Sunteți pe pagina 1din 606

ng

ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Electrical Systems in Oil & Gas Industry
E‐617 “Electricity and Electric motors”

29‐30‐31/10/2012
Patrick LEROUX

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
Contents
ht
rig
py
Co

1. General
• General considerations
• Electrical system description
2. Regulation and Standardization
• What is a regulation? – What is a standard?
• Regulations (American‐European)
• Standards (International – European – American – Others)
• Technical /Corporate specifications
3. Overall architecture of electrical systems
• Network structure
• Distribution

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Power availability
• Voltages /Frequencies
• One line diagrams (typical)
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 2
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
Contents
ht
rig
py
Co

4. Power Generation
• Gas Turbine package
• Generator
• Selection sizing rules
• Operation, maintenance
• Power generation (centralized vs. local)

5. Electrical equipment
• Transformers
• Switchgear
• Electrical control system (ECS)
• Batteries and UPS

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Cables

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 3
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
Contents
ht
rig
py
Co

6. Sub‐station arrangement
• Electrical room design
• Pre‐fabricated (modular) electrical room

7. Electric Motors
• Electric motor overview
• LV motors
• HV motors
• Starting
• Variable Speed Drive (VSD)

8. Lighting

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
9. Electrical maintenance

10.Offshore aspects
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 4
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
Contents
ht
rig
py

11.FPSO
Co

12. Electrical installation works


13.Electrical safety
• Dangers of electricity
• Electrical faults
• Protection against electrical faults
14.Electrical equipment for explosive atmospheres (Ex)
• Type of protection
• ATEX directives (European regulation)
• IECEx system (Worldwide)
ANNEXES

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Annex A: GTUA handbook (extract)
• Annex B: ATEX – IECEx comparison guide 

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 5
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

1. General

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS  

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 7
ng
ni
General considerations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

The following are general considerations, as seen by an electrical


Co

engineer (past, present, future)


 Permanent expansion with years (to maintain / increase production)

 Numerous modifications with years (oil & gas data changes) all along the field
life duration

 Provisions in the design for future expansion since the very beginning: power
plant / transformers / switchboards / lay‐out (indoor / outdoor)

 Connection to a public grid (reliability?) or local own generation

 Power supply to satellites (cluster) either by local generation or centralized


power generation and distribution (overhead lines or buried cables)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Connection to plant existing facilities with sometimes power plants
interconnection

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 8
ng
ni
General considerations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Construction works with sometimes electrical equipment energized (to


Co

reduce/limit shutdowns
 Revamping often complex, more and more with plant in production to limit
plant shut down
 Numerous people working together during construction (risk of clash)
 Intensive preparation of works required
 Logistics aspects… construction camp with 8000 people and more in the desert!
 Careful coordination of works during construction and revamping
 People might be completely isolated due to weather conditions(offshore)
 Extreme conditions to be taken into account at design stage (jungle, desert,
arctic areas)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Safety aspects are becoming of major importance

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 9
ng
ni
General considerations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Power increase since the 80’s (5/10 MW – 40 MW – 100 MW and more)


py
Co

 Use of Multiphasic pumps and PCP with variable speed drive (extra heavy oil)

 Use of Electro‐submersible pump (ESP) at variable speed (offshore). Operation


and maintenance always a tricky topic as well as rod beam pump (donkey
pump)

 LNG plants: trend to supply all the large compressors by electric motors (all
electric LNG plant) leading to power plants rated 1000 MW with internal
distribution at 230 kV. Main advantage: larger turbo‐generator unit (higher
efficiency), reduced number of units, global better availability, etc.

 Tar sands extraction (Canada) requires huge quantities of energy (steam).


Production in large quantities is a challenge

 Deep offshore requires installation of FPSO (especially in Africa)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 All electric FPSO are developing

 Development of all electric well


Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 10
ng
ni
General considerations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Sustainable Development input to be integrated in facilities


Co

design but with which impact? (CO2 emission, energy efficiency…)

 Motor efficiency: many efforts from manufacturers to increase


motor efficiency (and so reduce power consumption). Legal
aspects in Europe

 Consideration for use of Renewable Energies (solar energy


already used on remote satellites, power grid supply if origin from
hydraulic power (e.g.: Venezuela, Norway, etc.)

 First development of platforms supplied by HVDC subsea cable


from the shore ,suppressing power plant on platform (North sea)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Project costs are higher and higher ( billions of US $ )

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 11
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 12
ng
ni
Electrical system description

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 An electrical system includes always 3 parts whatever the type of


Co

industry concerned

• POWER SUPPLY
• DISTRIBUTION
• CONSUMERS

 This section aims at covering only a few basics

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 13
ng
ni
General

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

1. Power supply
py

To supply the plant with electrical power


Co

2 options:
1. Public utility: Main intake
2. Own generation: Generating sets
2. Distribution
Power transmission from electrical source to consumers
• Distances and power determine rated voltages to be selected (standardized values)
• Voltage transformation for use by consumer (in one or several steps) transformers
• Equipment energization (switching on/off) switchgear
• Interconnection of equipment by cables requiring many accessories: bulk materials
3. Consumers
Users of electrical energy:
• Motors
• Lighting
• Heaters

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Ups
• Power electronics (drives)
• Etc.

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 14
ng
ni
Typical one line diagram (onshore)

ai
Tr
P
IF OWN GENERATION EMERGENCY
PUBLIC UTILITY ( TURBO GENERATOR POWER SUPPLY
ht
OR ( DIESEL GENERATOR )
DIESEL GENERATOR )
G
rig

Metering Metering E
Protections Protections N
Measures Measures
E
py

CB CB R
Co

A
IS IS IS IS G G T
Bars A T
~ ~ I
Bars B O
TI IS IS IS IS N

CB CB

230kV 230kV 11kV


TR TR TR
33kV 33kV 33kV

'' 33kV '' HV


SWITCHBOARD CB CB CB
CB CB
CB CB CB

D
33kV 33kV 33kV I
TR TR TR S
11kV 6.6kV 6.6kV T
R
'' 6.6kV '' HV SWITCHBOARD I
CB CB B
CB U
CB CB CB T
I
O
6.6kV 6.6kV
N
TR TR
0.4kV 0.4kV

'' 400V '' LV SWITCHBOARD


CB CB CB
CB CB

MCC LIGHTING DC BATTERIES LIGHTING


LIGHTING MCC
CHARGER /
AC UPS

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
C
O
N
LIGHTING LIGHTING S
CIRCUITS CIRCUITS U
M
M PACKAGE INSTRUMENTS PACKAGE E
M & VITAL R
M M CONSUMERS
M M
S

NORMAL EMERGENCY ESSENTIAL


Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 15
ng
ni
Typical offshore key one line diagram

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

( NC )
Co

EDG
(1)

TG auxiliaries
HVAC

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
(1) Other solution is to supply
from QP platform EDG

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 16
ng
ni
Power supply

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1. Public utility
Co

Intake substation
• A substation at which the supply provided by the Public Utility is
interconnected with the site’s electrical distribution system
• The Intake substation may receive its power from the Public Utility
generating stations through 1 or 2 overhead lines
For: REFINERIES, PETROCHEMICAL PLANTS and sometimes ONSHORE
OIL/GAS PRODUCTION PLANTS
2. Own generation (private)
Generating sets = G.S
• GS  Rotating machine transforming mechanical or thermal energy into
electricty
• GS = DRIVER + GENERATOR
• DRIVER = gas turbine / steam turbine / diesel engine / gas engine

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• GENERATOR = A machine which converts mechanical power into electrical
power

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 17
ng
ni
Power supply

ai
Tr
P
IF
3. Selection between public utility and own generation
ht
rig

• Depends on:
py

− Public Utility (P.U) network capacity (MW available)


Co

− Power availability (frequency of power cuts / outages / disturbances) – may be


sometimes difficult to appraise
− Cost of local kWh
− Cooling water availability (when required), etc.
• Requires a technico‐economical analysis to be carried out at an early Project stage
based on CAPEX + OPEX evaluation using NPV calculations.
− CAPEX = CAPital EXpenditures (initial investment)
− OPEX = OPerating EXpenditures (maintenance, fuel, … costs)
− NPV = Net Present Value (Value of 1$ today spent in n years)
• Sometimes power supply to the plant may be a combination of P.U + own
generation (e.g = REFINERY)
4. POWER SYSTEM AVAILABILITY
• Electrical loads (electrical consumers) are classified as performing a service which is:
− VITAL
− ESSENTIAL

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− NORMAL
• The power system shall be designed in accordance with the required SERVICE
• VITAL SERVICE (SAFETY MATTER) – REGULATIONS  Duplication of energy source /
lines supply / equipment is necessary.
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 18
ng
ni
Power supply

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 EXAMPLES:
Co

• Emergency lighting and escape lighting, and beaconing (offshore)


• Public address / general alarm system
• Boiler feed water supply system by means of 1 electrically driven and 1 steam
driven pump, or 2 electrically driven pump supplied from 2 independent sources ‐
U.P.S
• Fire & Gas system, etc.
• Power comes generally from UPS (batteries system)
 ESSENTIAL SERVICE (ECONOMIC MATTER) NO REGULATIONS
• Consequences of service interruptions shall be analyzed in relation with complete
or partial duplication of sources / lines / equipement or automatic restarting or
changeover facilities
• Plant area lighting (% of normal lighting)
• Air instrument compressors by means of duplicated compressors
• Production transport by means of duplicated pumps
• Power comes generally from an emergency diesel generator
NORMAL SERVICE

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training

• Loss of production, quality
• Power comes from Public Utility or Own generation

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 19
ng
ni
Distribution

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

The architecture of the electrical system is always a compromise between:


py


Co

• Cost:
Low cost requires use of a simple radial system (instead of a dual system), power
supply by a single transformer (no redundancy), a system design with low short
circuit current (fault level) to reduce switchgear cost, etc.
• Power availability:
A higher availability requires redundancy in electrical sources, lines supply,
equipment. e.g:
− 2 transformers in // to supply 1 switchboard
− 1 emergency diesel generator (in case of normal power failure) which increase
costs!
 The solution, i.e the ONE LINE DIAGRAM, will be a compromise between an acceptable
cost for an acceptable power availability.
 The distribution system includes mainly: transformers, switchboards (including
switchgear) and cables
 The switchgear includes mainly switching devices having 3 different functions:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Isolation (of 2 portion of circuits)
• Control (opening, closing upon an order)
• Protection against fault (overload, short circuit, earth fault, etc.)

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 20
ng
ni
Distribution

ai
Tr
P
IF
Electrical apparatus Capability to switch
ht
rig

Isolator switch At no load only
py
Co

Switch Rated current only
Circuit breaker Rated current + short circuit current
Fuse Short circuit current (only once)
Contactor Automatic switch (with a high number 
of opening / closing)

DIMENSIONS, WEIGHTS, COSTS OF THESE ITEMS ARE VERY DIFFERENT


 Switchgear is enclosed in metallic switchboard (for safety reasons) located in
switchrooms.
 A main switchboard is a switchboard to which generators and outgoing feeders are
connected.
 A distribution switchboard is mainly used for distributing power to several plant
substations.
 A plant substation is mainly used for feeding one process or utility area.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 A power plant:
• installation to generate electricity including civil engineering works, all equipment
for energy conversion and ancillary equipment

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 21
ng
ni
Consumers

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

Electrical Consumers (loads) are mainly motors, lighting, heaters,


rig

and sometimes Variable Speed Drives (V.S.D.).


py
Co

 MOTORS:
From 0.25 kW to several MW, they are practically:
• AC type (squirrel cage type) – Most of them
• A few are of DC type(small ratings)
• A few are of synchronous type (very large ratings)
They drive pumps, compressors, fans, agitators, etc., either directly (no
gear) or through a gearbox, or a belt / pulley system.

 LIGHTING:
Generally made of fluorescent lighting fittings (e.g. 2 x40 W), and also
sodium HP lamp floodlights (for large area). Emergency lighting includes
luminaries fitted with internal batteries to give 1‐2 hours autonomy.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 HEATERS:
Made of resistors connected through contactors (regulation by steps) or
through a thyristor controlled system (smooth regulation).

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 22
ng
ni
Consumers

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

 V.S.D. (Variable Speed Drive sometimes referred as ASD=Adjustable Speed


rig

Drive )
py
Co

A V.S.D. (Variable Speed Drive) equipment is made of:


• an input transformer (optional)
• a rectifier bridge for AC transformation to DC
• an inverter bridge for DC transformation to AC
• an inductance (optional)
• harmonic filters (optional)
• motor (induction or synchronous)

• Oil & Gas plant: drilling platforms use DC drives (mud pumps…).
Production plants use small AC drives for pumping (onshore),
medium size drives for ESP (Electro Submersible Pumps) and
sometimes large drives for gas compressors (40MW!), or water
injection.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Petrochemical plants use VSD for extruders (10 W), mixers, etc.
• Refineries have very few VSD applications.
Note: ASD (Adjustable Speed Drive) is a more appropriate wording

Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 23
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply)


Co

 These units aim at supplying consumers which cannot tolerate


power failure or disturbances coming from the normal power
supply

 They include a rectifier bridge, a battery, an inverter + a


distribution panel to supply loads at AC .

 For loads to be supplied at DC, the units include a rectifier bridge


a battery + a distribution panel (they are not normally called UPS)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical_ systems_in_O&G_Industry ‐ Part 1 24
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

2. Regulation & Standardization
What is a regulation? What is a standard?

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2
ng
ni
Foreword 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Attention is drawn to readers that this chapter MUST not be


Co

ignored by engineers, technicians, supervisors, whatever the


domain in which they will work, since their responsibility may be
engaged!

 Only principles and main basis are given in this short presentation
and update is necessary for any related activity

The World of “Electricity” is a domain 

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
which is highly regulated and standardized!
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 2
ng
ni
Regulation & standardization  

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Industrial facilities, including electrical installations, are subject to


Co

meet requirements of rules

 These rules can be divided into 2 categories:


• REGULATION application is mandatory (law)
• STANDARD application is on a voluntary basis, except if it has
been enforced by law or is adopted in a business
contract

 The rule of LAW is a « legal maxim » that states no person is


immune to law

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 3
ng
ni
Regulation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 REGULATION is controlling human or societal behaviour by rules


Co

or restrictions

 Several forms:
• Legal restrictions promulgated by a government authority
• Self regulation by an industry (e.g. through a trade association as an
example the European Chemical Industry Council (CEFIC) – Conseil
Européen des Fédérations des Industries Chimiques
• Social regulation
• Market regulation, etc.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 4
ng
ni
Examples of  regulation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 USA:
Co

• O.S.H.A. (Occupational Health and Safety Administration) for onshore


• M.O.S.H.A. (for mines)
• Coast Guards (offshore…)
 EUROPE
• DIRECTIVE (European Law)
A European DIRECTIVE requires that the member states add or modify
their legislation to be in conformity with a single / commons text
(approved by all the E.U. members), sometimes referred as “transposition
into national law”
 Other international regulations:
• International Marine Organisation (I.M.O.)
− For each domain there are often several applicable regulations
− RULES for classification of ships (not considered as regulations)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Bureau Veritas, Det Norske Veritas, Lloyd's Register of Shipping, American
Bureau of Shipping…

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 5
ng
ni
European law

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The main goal of the European Union EU is the progressive


Co

integration of Member States’ economic and political systems


and the establishment of a single market based on the free
movement of goods, people, money and services.

 To this end, its Member States cede part of their sovereignty


under the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union
(TFEU) which empowers the EU institutions to adopt laws.

 These laws (regulations, directives and decisions) take


precedence over national law and are binding on national

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
authorities. The EU also issues non‐binding documents, such as
recommendations

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 6
ng
ni
European law

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Regulation:
Co

automatic enforcement, no action from national government for


implementation

 Directive:
addressed to national authorities who must then take action to
make them part of national law (transposition)
used to bring different national laws into line which each other
(e.g.: product safety standards)

 Decision: specific cases for particular authorities

The Commission’s role is to ensure EU laws are properly applied


(possible sanctions up to the European Court of Justice)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 7
ng
ni
New approach directives

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The European Union directives known as the “New Approach


Co

directives” define “essential requirements” as to health, safety


and environment issues. Products must meet these requirements
in order to be placed on the European market.

 The three European Standardisation Organisations, CEN


(European Committee for Standardisation), CENELEC (European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation) and ETSI
(European Telecommunications Standards Institute) enable these
requirements to be fulfilled through the path of harmonised
European standards.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 8
ng
ni
European directives

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electromagnetic Compatibility    Medical Devices: Active Implantable 
Co

2004/108/EC  90/385/EEC 
 Explosive Atmospheres 94/9/EC   Medical Devices: In Vitro Diagnostic 
98/79/EC 
 Gas Appliances 90/396/EEC 
 Non‐automatic Weighing Instruments 
 Interoperability of European High‐speed  90/384/EEC 
Railway 96/48/EC + 2008/57/EC
 Personal Protective Equipment 
 Interoperability of trans‐European  89/686/EEC 
conventional rail 2001/16/EC + 
2008/57/EC   Pressure Equipment 97/23/EC 
 Low‐Voltage Equipment 2006/95/EC   Radio & Telecom Terminal Equipment 
99/5/EC 
 Machinery 2006/42/EC 
 Recreational Craft 94/25/EC 
 Measuring Instruments 2004/22/EC 
 Safety of Toys 88/378/EEC + 

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Medical Devices 93/42/EEC  2009/48/EC

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 9
ng
ni
International standard (definition as per ISO)*

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 An International standard is a document, established by


Co

consensus and approved by a recognized body, that provides, for


common and repeated use, rules, guidelines or characteristics for
activities or their results, aimed at the achievement of the
optimum degree of order in a given context.

 This international standard is made available to the public.

 The word "consensus" is important since it represents a common


viewpoint of those parties concerned with its provisions, namely
producers, users, consumers and general interest groups
(stakeholders)

 Consensus does not imply unanimity!

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
* ISO =International Standardization Organization (created by the United Nations in 1946)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 10
ng
ni
Standardization bodies

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

LEVEL NON ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS


Co

INTERNATIONAL ISO IEC IUT


EUROPEAN CEN CENELEC ETSI
North American ASTM ASME NFPA  (NEC)
ANSI API NEMA IEEE
National
 France AFNOR UTE
 Germany DIN VDE
 U.K BSI BSI
 Italy CEI
 Russia  GOST GOST

ISO = International Standardization Organization 
IEC = International Electrotechnical Commission

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
NFPA =National Fire Protection Association
NEC = National  Electrical Code
NEMA =National  Electrical  Manufacturers Association
IEEE =Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 11
ng
ni
International  Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Leading global organization that prepares and publishes


Co

international standards for all electrical, electronic and related


technologies
Serve as a basis for national standardization and as references
when drafting International tenders and contracts.
 IEC promotes international cooperation on all questions of
electrotechnical standardization and related matters
 IEC charter embraces all electrotechnologies including electronics,
magnetics and electromagnetics, electroacoustics, multimedia,
telecommunication, and energy production and distribution, as
well as associated general disciplines such as terminology and
symbols, electromagnetic compatibility, measurement and
performance, dependability, design and development, safety and

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
the environment.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 12
ng
ni
IEC Standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Adoption of IEC standards by any country, whether it is a member


Co

of the Commission or not, is entirely voluntary.

 IEC's international standards facilitate world trade by removing


technical barriers to trade (TBT) leading to new markets and
economic growth.

 Trend to a worldwide harmonization: differences between I.E.C.


and national standards should become the exception.

 Head office in Geneva

 IEC Standards published in English /French

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Translation in Russian available

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 13
ng
ni
IEC Structure 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 14
ng
ni
IEC in figures 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Founded in 1906  Language: French/English
Co

 Head office in Genova (Switzerland)  Countries without standards: IEC 
used as reference documents 
 Country members = 79 national 
committees  Countries with their own standards: 
IEC used as a basis for writing of 
 Affiliate countries = 81 participants  national standards 

 90% world’s population  Standards published = 5500 !

 95% world’s electrical energy   Technical specifications= 200

 IEC: electrical division of ISO   Technical reports = 350

 IEC publishes standards (worlwide   Working groups (WG) = 400

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
minimum consensus)
 Maintenance teams (MT) = 500

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 15
ng
ni
Relationship with other organizations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

The IEC works closely with international standardization


Co

partners:
 the International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
 the International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
 the World Health Organization (WHO)
 the International Labour Office (ILO)
 the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE)
 the International Council on Large Electric Systems (CIGRE)
 the International Maritime Organization (IMO)
 the International Organization of Legal Metrology (OIML)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 16
ng
ni
Relationship with other organizations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Governmental agencies
Co

 One of the IEC's principal partners is the World Trade


Organization (WTO), whose 100‐plus central government
members explicitly recognize, through their Agreement on
Technical Barriers to Trade (TBT), that international standards
play a critical role in improving industrial efficiency and
developing world trade. These relations at government level are
of particular importance in heavily regulated areas like safety,
health and the environment.
 The IEC encourages industrializing nations to share in the benefits
of joining in its work and liaises closely with the International
Monetary Fund (IMF), the European Bank for Reconstruction and
Development (EBRD), the World Bank, and the United Nations

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Development Programme (UNDP).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 17
ng
ni
Relationship with other organizations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Co‐operation between the IEC and CANENA


Co

• The co‐operation agreement between the IEC and CANENA (Council for
Harmonization of Electrotechnical Standards of the Nations of the
Americas) – September 2000 – relates to:
− promote the use of IEC standards with CANENA members and enhance
technical cooperation

 Co‐operation between the IEC and CENELEC


• The co‐operation agreement between the IEC and CENELEC (European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization) ratified in September
1996, and commonly known as the Dresden Agreement, relates to:
− common planning of new work and parallel IEC/CENELEC voting,
• The object of this agreement is to avoid duplication of efforts, speed up
the preparation of standards and to ensure the best use of the resources
available and particularly of experts’ time. If the results of parallel voting
are positive in both the IEC and CENELEC, the IEC will publish the
international standard, while the CENELEC Technical Board will ratify the

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
European standard.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 18
ng
ni
CENELEC standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Comité Européen de Normalisation Électrotechnique (CENELEC) (European Committee


Co

for Electrotechnical standardisation)


 Officially recognized by the European Commission
 Founded in 1973
 Head office in Brussels (Belgium)
 31 CENELEC members +12 Affiliates
 CENELEC: electrical division of CEN
 CENELEC published standards (on the basis of IEC standards)
 Language: French / English / German
 Overall level of equivalence between IEC and CENELEC Standards (at the end of 2009)
Identical to the IEC  4105 72.45 % 
Based on the IEC  393 6.94 % 

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Purely European  1168 20.61 % 
Total  5666  100%

Total number of documents  including technical reports, guides, etc. = 6200  (about 200 000 pages!)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 19
ng
ni
CENELEC standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Harmonized Standards are those that fulfill the requirements set


Co

by New Approach Directives. These Standards are unique in the


sense that they provide presumption of conformity with the
European legal framework. In other words, and this is a specific
feature of the European Standardization System, Harmonized
Standards help manufacturers comply with the applicable law.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 20
ng
ni
IEC/EN coordination 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 To avoid duplicate works in writting standards an agreement has been placed


Co

between IEC and CENELEC. (Dresden agreement)


 Standard numbering: a common numbering has been adopted between IEC
and CENELEC: (Cenelec has adopted the one of IEC)
 Today 5 digits – before 3 digits (eg 60079 today against 079 in the past)
 Yet there are still national standards in each E.U. country, as in the past, but
they are often identical to the CENELEC and IEC standards
 For example the numbering of a standard related to equipment for explosive
atmosphere is
• UK: BSI/EN/IEC 60079
• Germany: VDE/EN/IEC 60079
• France: NFC/EN/IEC 60079
 In this case these 3 documents shall be strictly identical, only the cover sheet
is different for each country

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 This process is called harmonization of standards

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 21
ng
ni
American standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A.N.S.I (American National Standards Institute)


Co

 N.F.P.A. (National Fire Protection Association) publishes the National Electrical


Code (NEC)

 I.E.E.E (Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers)

 N.E.M.A (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)

 C.S.A (Canadian Standards Association) publishes the C.E.C. # N.E.C

 A.P.I. (American Petroleum Institute)

 A.G.A. (American Gas Association)

 A.S.T.M (American Society for Testing and Materials)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 U.L (Underwritters Laboratories) is a NRTL (National Recognized Testing
Laboratories)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 22
ng
ni
Other standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Russia: Gost standards… many similarities with IEC standards!


Co

 China: More and more similarities with IEC standards!

 There is a trend in the world to « copy » the IEC standards as the


basis for preparation of national standards because they
represent the largest technical consensus in the world

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 23
ng
ni
Evolution of standards in the future 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Can we dream to have one day a single global standard?


Co

 Many efforts have been made during the last 30 years to tend to this aim

 Today many standards are identical between IEC, EN and countries in the E.U,
yet there are still differences in a certain number of cases but which should
become exceptional in the future

 This trend is called HARMONIZATION

 American standards are fully different from IEC and EN standards!!

 Yet recently efforts have been made to have a few common IEEE/IEC
standards…

 Do not forget that standards represent a barrier to trade

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 So it’s the interest of everybody that standards become identical

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 24
ng
ni
Content of a regulation, content of a standard

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A Regulation gives always the aims to reach (avoid electrocution,


Co

avoid explosion, protect staff at work, etc.) but generally no


details are given on how to reach these aims

 A Standard gives the technical details for construction of an


equipment, tests to be made for acceptance, etc.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 25
ng
ni
Compliance with regulations and standards in a project

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 In most countries, electrical installations shall comply with more


Co

than one set of regulations, issued by National Authorities or by


recognized private bodies.

 It is essential to take into account these local constraints before


starting the design.

 In addition the Operator shall decide himself which standards


shall be applied to his project (free choice unless it has been
enforced by law)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 26
ng
ni
Technical specifications

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A technical specification is an explicit set of requirements to be


Co

satisfied by a material, product, or service.


 A technical specification may be developed privately, for
example, by a private company, a corporation, a regulatory body,
or a military organization, or it may be developed by standard
organizations
 Sometimes the term specification is used in connection with a
data sheet (or spec sheet). A data sheet is usually used for
technical communication to describe technical characteristics of
an item or product. It can be published by a manufacturer to help
people choose products or to help use the products.
 A data sheet is not a technical specification . The term data sheet

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
may also refers to a document to be fulfilled by the client to
determine the data of the purchased (eg motor data sheet)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 27
ng
ni
Technical specifications

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 In engineering, manufacturing, and business, it is vital for


Co

suppliers, purchasers, and users of materials, products, or


services to understand and agree upon all requirements.

 A specification is a type of a “standard” which is often referenced


by a contract or procurement document. It provides the
necessary details about the specific requirements.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 28
ng
ni
Corporate Specifications

ai
Tr
P
IF
 Many Oil companies have their own corporate specifications
ht
rig
py

These specifications normally include references to:


Co

 specific standards to be applied (IEC, NEMA, etc.)

 specific requirements not included in standards (eg special


painting for corrosion resistance)

 selection among various choices offered by the standard (eg


Factory Acceptance Tests – FAT)

 specific requirements issued from feedback (experience /know


how of the company)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 CAUTION!

 Company specific requirements must not be in contradiction with


regulations or standards!
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 29
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

3. Overall Architecture of Electrical Systems

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2
ng
ni
Choice of optimal network structure and operation 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Different network structures are possible, the


py

most common of which are described in this


Co

chapter together with the main areas in


which they are used.
The choice of a network structure, which is
always a decisive factor in terms of energy
availability, is often a difficult one to make.
The most rational method consists of making
a quick comparison of the unavailability of
voltage at a particular point in the network
for different structures and using a very
interesting expert system (see appendix 2).
 Standard network structures
• Open or closed loop, also called “primary loop
system” (see fig. 10)
Recommended for very widespread networks,
with major future extensions. Open loop
operation is advisable.
• Double radial feeder, also called “primary
selective system” (manual or automatic) (see
fig 11)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Recommended for very widespread networks
with limited future extensions and which
require a high level of continuous power
supply

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 31
ng
ni
Choice of optimal network structure and operation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

• Radial feeder, also called “single power


rig

supply” (see fig. 12)


py

Recommended when continuous power


Co

supply requirements are limited. It is often


used for cement plant networks.
• Dual power supply (see fig. 13)
Recommended when a high level of
continuous power supply is required or when
the operating and maintenance teams are
small. It is very often used in the steel and
petrochemical industries
• Dual busbar (see fig. 14)
Recommended when a very high level of
continuous power supply is required or when
there are very strong load fluctuations The
load may be distributed between the two
busbars without any tweak in the power
supply.
• With energy generating sets (see fig 15)
This is a classic structure when public grid
and own generation are present and is vary
often used
• With replacement source and load shedding
(see fig. 16)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
This is the typical case for an industrial
network in which a very high level of
continuous power supply is required using a
single power supply source, i.e. the utility

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 32
ng
ni
Distribution 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

GENERAL ARCHITECTURE
Co

 Dual radial feeder arrangement in most cases (higher availability).


 2 incoming + 1 bus tie CB’s.
 Coupling is NC (normally closed) at the main HV bus bar (turbo
generators).
 Coupling is NO (normally open)at the LV busbar (to reduce the SCC
level and size of equipment).
 Motor feeders on both sides of incomers (symmetry).
 Single radial feeder for small power supply.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Loop system for distribution to remote satellites in the desert.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 33
ng
ni
One line diagram

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Always a compromise for having a higher availability (feeder /


Co

transformer redundancy and several sources in //) leading to a


SCC increase, with at the end acceptable SCC levels to limit cost
and size of equipment.

 A high SCC level may be sometimes useful to limit voltage drops


during large motor starting.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 34
ng
ni
Power availability

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electrical loads (electrical consumers) are classified as performing a service


Co

which is:
• Normal
• Essential
• Emergency /vital
 The power system shall be designed in accordance with the required SERVICE
 Normal service
• Loads which have no effect either on the safety or the safeguard of
installation of equipment in case of normal generation failure
• → Loss of production, quality.
 Essential service (economic matter) No regulations
• → Loads involved in the safeguard of equipment or installation and in the
restarting of the installation after a plant SD
• EXAMPLES:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− plant area lighting (% of normal lighting)
− air instrument compressors (duplicated compressors).
− production transport by means of duplicated pumps
− power plant auxiliaries

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 35
ng
ni
Power availability

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Emergency (safety matter) Regulations


Co

• Loads affecting personal safety whether directly or indirectly and


inducing risk of major damages on installation or equipment .These
loads are connected to switchgear with an emergency sources of
power (batteries, inverter fed by batteries).
• → Duplication of energy source / lines supply / equipment is
necessary.
• EXAMPLES:
− Emergency lighting and escape lighting, and beaconing (offshore).
− Public address / general alarm system.
− Boiler feedwater supply system by means of 1 electrically driven and 1
steam driven pump, or 2 electrically driven pump supplied from 2
independent sources – U.P.S

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− Fire & Gas system, etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 36
ng
ni
Voltages – Frequency 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Low Voltage (LV) < 1000 V (ac)


Co

• The IEC recommends a “world” standard of 230/400 V for 3‐phase


4‐wire systems. This is a compromise level and will allow existing
systems which operate at 220/380 V and at 240/415 V, or close to
these values, to comply with the proposed standard simply by
adjusting the off‐circuit tapping switches of standard distribution
transformers.
• Other voltages: 400/660 V 3ph‐3w
• North America: 120/208 – 277/480 – 347/600 V

 High Voltage (HV) > 1000V (ac)


• Standardized values (except North America): as per IEC 60 038
3,3kV – 6,6 kV – 11kV – 22kV – 33kV – 132kV
• Standardized values (North America): as per IEC 60 038

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
4.16 – 12.47 – 13.2 – 13.8 – 24.94 – 34.5 kV

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 37
ng
ni
Voltages – Frequency

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DC Voltages
Co

12 ‐ 24 ‐ 48 ‐110 ‐ 220 V
• Note: the word Medium voltage (MV) is often found in technical
litterature 1kV <Voltages < 50 kV, but is not defined in IEC

 FREQUENCIES
• 60 Hz North America, Saudi Arabia, Brazil, Venezuela,
• 50 Hz Europe (including former Soviet Union), Africa, Asia (except
Korea, Taiwan, The Philippines), Australia, South America
(Argentina, Chili, Uruguay, Paraguay, Guyana)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 38
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
M es s ag e
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 39
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 40
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 41
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 42
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 43
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 44
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

4. Power Generation

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2
ng
ni
Gas turbine package

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

GENERATING SET = DRIVER + ALTERNATOR + AUXILIARIES:


Co

 DRIVER:
• Steam turbine: very large power (several hundreds of Mw) not for offshore applications
• Gas turbine: large range of output:1 to 200 Mw (aero‐derivative type)
• Diesel engine: ‐ Emergency diesel generator (e.g. = 630 ‐ 1250 kVA)
‐ Small and average power for continuous production (up to a few Mw’s)
‐ Drilling
• Gas engine: for continuous production (up to 2‐3 Mw) – Avoids diesel oil consumption.
 ALTERNATOR (AC GENERATOR)
 AUXILIARIES:
• Air inlet (filters)
• Exhaust system
• Fuel preheating
• Oil cooling and lubrification
• Starting system (electrical or pneumatic)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Fuel supply and storage
• Electrical auxiliaries: control panels, protective relays, motors supply, etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 46
ng
ni
Gas turbine package

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

SOLAR turbines

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 47
ng
ni
Generator 1/6

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Alternator principle
Co

 A rotating magnetic field (electro‐magnet supported by the rotor


driven by the driving machine)

 Induces by flux variation a voltage in the fixed stator windings

 The frequency of the current is given by:


F = p. N

Speed in Rotation 
Frequency in  per second
Hertz (HZ) Number of pairs
of poles

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 48
ng
ni
Generator 2/6

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Diesel speed is = 1500 ‐ 1000 ‐ 750 RPM and lower


Co

• Corresponding to an alternator with N = 2 ‐ 3 ‐ 4 pairs of poles for 50 Hz (or 1800 ‐


1200 ‐ 900 RPM for 60 Hz).
→ Direct coupling diesel and alternator.
 Gas turbine speed is = 10 000 ... 15 000 RPM
• Maximum speed for an alternator at 50 Hz with p = 1 (pair of pole) is 3000 rpm
hence a gear between gas turbine and alternator (effi 98‐99% ‐ Cooling ‐
lubrification).
• Only large power gas turbines running at 3000 RPM can allow for a direct coupling.
 2 types of technologies for alternator:
• Salient poles: N < 1500 RPM for average / small power.
• Solid poles: N = 3000 RPM (2 poles) for large power.
 Voltages
• 400 V: up to 2 ‐ 3 MVA
• 6.6 kV: 2 TO 15 MVA
• 11/13.8 kV: 10 to 40 MVA

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• 22 kV: > 30 MVA (to be investigated)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 49
ng
ni
Generator 3/6

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
ABB Cross section HV generators AMS 710

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 50
ng
ni
Generator 4/6

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
ABB Cross section AMS 1000‐1250

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 51
ng
ni
Generator 5/6

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 POWER (OUTPUT)
Co

• Alternator = kVA manufacturer catalogue


• Turbine, diesel = kW read the GTUA book (Gas Turbine User
Association) by standardization – An alternator is
designed for a power factor (P. F.) Cos Ø = 0.8

 EXAMPLE
• An alternator rated 1000 kVA will be driven by a diesel having a minimum
output
− P = S.Cos Ø = 1000 x 0.8 = 800 kW (More for margin and losses)
− If PF of user is above 0.8 (says 0.9) the generating set shall not be able to
deliver the maximum required power
(P = S.Cos Ø → P = 1000 x 0.9 = 900 kW
because the diesel engine has been rated for only 800 kw (standard design)
− If PF of user is below 0.8 (says 0.7) the generating set shall not be able to

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
deliver the required power (due to excessive excitation current although the
diesel engine has only to supply 1000 x 0.7 = 700 kW)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 52
ng
ni
Generator 6/6

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 GENERATOR COOLING
Co

• Primary cooling fluid is always air (up to 150 MVA) for above
values, cooling is by hydrogen
− Self ventilated (fans on shaft)

• Secondary cooling fluid may be:


− Air: air coolers (air to air heat exchanger)
dusty / polluted cooling air does not penetrate into the alternator
− Water: water coolers (air to water heat exchanger)
• Soft water (open or closed circuit)
• Sea water (open circuit including an intermediate soft water circuit)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 53
ng
ni
Selection sizing rules

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Power plant:
Co

• Several generating sets operating in //.


• Number and ratings of gen sets requires.
• A carefully study at pre‐project stage including the following
considerations:
− Operation at (N + 1) or (N + 2) sets (1 or 2 machines in standby).
− Ratings of potential gas turbine (depending on manufacturer
selection).
− AVAILABLE OUTPUT AT AMBIANT TEMPERATURE SITE (derating
factors, efficiencies).
− Expected reliability‐references of machines.
− Pre‐selection of TG package can be done using the “GTUA” book (Gas
Turbine User Association).
• Provisions for expansion in the future (space on PF, substation
provisions, SCC levels calculated with the final number of expected

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
TG’s, etc.).
− Cost etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 54
ng
ni
Operation maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Operation of generators in // requires:


Co

• Synchronization devices (to allow connection of a new unit).


• Frequency regulation by action on the driver governor (speed).
• Voltage regulation by action on automatic voltage regulator (AVR).
• Load sharing to allow active and reactive power equal sharing.
• Load shedding: in case of loss of one (or several) generator sets,
immediate opening of main circuit breakers supplying switchboards
is required to avoid overloading of remaining units.
• Stability study:
− Operation of several generating sets in // requires during design phase
a complex study to check correct operation of the whole electrical
system upon various disturbances (loss of 1‐2 generators, short circuit
at various levels, starting of a large motor, etc.)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− A dynamic simulation has to be carried out modellising all the network
(using transfer function of voltage / speed regulation, etc.)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 55
ng
ni
Operation maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Number of TG’s in operation depends on the ambient temperature.


Co

 TG starting = 10 mn on diesel fuel & 30mn on gas fuel.

 TG stop (normal = 10mn; emergency with post lubrification system (DC) during
several hours.

 GAS TURBINE MAINTENANCE


• FREQUENCY / DURATION
− aeroderivative: 1 week every 3 years (gas generator)
− heavy duty (onshore): 1 month every 3 years
− yearly average: 10 days (aero) – 15 days (heavy)
• VERY QUALIFIED PEOPLE (manufacturer)
• HIGH COST

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 ALTERNATOR MAINTENANCE
• Every 5 years (Exciter rollers, etc.)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 56
ng
ni
Power generation (Centralized vs. Local)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A) Centralized generation
Co

• TG’s, or Diesel with distribution through buried cables or overhead


lines to satellites (to avoid multiplication of small and remote
power plants)
• Advantages:
− One single power plant (maintenance, operation easier)
− Higher global efficiency
− Lower opex
− Higher availability
• Drawbacks
− Higher capex

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 57
ng
ni
Power generation (Centralized vs. Local)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 B) Local generation
Co

• Advantages:
− Lower Capex
• Drawbacks:
− Poor overall efficiency
− Limited availability
− Higher Opex (maintenance, fuel supply)
− CO2, NOX emission and noise
− Remote control not easy

Selection
The best solution depends of many factors: distances, power, accessibility, nature of
soils, fuel supply, etc.
Calculations must often been made between the 2 possible solutions including NPV
calculations.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Such calculations may show that the optimum solution (minimize Capex + Opex) is not
necessarily the solution with the lower Capex (solution preferred by the investor!!)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 2 58
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

5. Electrical Equipment

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

5.1 TRANSFORMERS

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 2
ng
ni
Transformers

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Transformer is a static apparatus which by electro‐magnetic induction,


Co

transforms alternating voltage and current between 2 (or more) windings


at the same frequency and usually at different values of voltages and
currents. (Reversible device)
An alternating voltage U1 is applied to a winding (N1 turns):

This generates an alternating flux of the same frequency in the core to the
secondary windings (N2 turns)

This flux induces a voltage U2 at the secondary terminals

The ratio of U2 / U1 =k is called the “transformer ratio”.

It is also approximatively equal to the ratio of the currents ( I1/ I2 )

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 3
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Active elements:
Co

• Magnetic circuit.
• Magnetic circuit is made of grain oriented magnetic steel sheet
(extra low iron losses) strongly assembled.
• Windings are made of conductors insulated with craft paper tube.
• Primary and secondary windings immersed in oil enclosed in a tank.
• Cooling system
− air: natural or forced
− water: heat exchanger + fans (very large transformers)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 4
ng
ni
Oil immersed transformers 

ai
Tr
P
IF
Cooling principles
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 5
ng
ni
Transformers

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Auxiliaries
Co

Bushings (lv ‐ hv connections) ‐ cable boxes ‐ isolating valves ‐


buchholz relay ‐ multi‐control relay (gas pressure, temperature
monitoring) ‐ lifting lugs ‐ rating plate ‐ earthling bolts ‐ off load
tap changers (to adapt voltages to + 2.5% + 5% for example) upon
request on load tap changers
 Main features
• Very high efficiency (> 99%...)
• Very limited maintenance (oil checking)
• High reliability
• Installation rules (oil draining, fire protection...)

 2 types of transformers

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Oil immersed
• Dry type

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 6
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Oil immersed transformers


Co

 2 types of technology:
• Issue = oil dilatation due to temperature rise:
− Breathing type: with conservator (large power)
− Hermetically sealed oil expansion is possible thanks to tank expansion
no humidity can penetrate (small ‐ medium power)
• Liquid filling type
− Mineral oil (the less expensive ‐ fire protection)
− Silicone oil (+ 30% in price versus mineral oil ‐ does not ignite upon a
short ‐ circuit)
− Askarel pcb (pyralene, ...): Fire‐proof but emits dioxine!
Manufacture = forbidden
Use = rules to be observed
Destruction = in approved centres

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 All these types are for outdoor use (possible for indoor)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 7
ng
ni
Oil immersed transformers 

ai
Tr
P
IF
Hermetically sealed with integral filling
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 8
ng
ni
Oil immersed transformers breathing type with 

ai
Tr
P conservator
IF
HV connectors
ht
rig

Porcelain bushings
py
Co

Conservator

Fans

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

36 MVA transformer

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 10
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Dry type transformer


Co

 Air:
• Subject to air humidity + air pollution
• Bulky ‐ expensive ‐ for indoor use only
 Cast resin:
• Winding are moulded with special
• Resins ‐ expensive ‐ for indoor use only
 Transformer types:
• Step‐up transformer = 11 kV/33kV
• Step‐down transformer = 20kV/400V
• Autotransformer (one winding) for large motor starting
• Instrument transformers:
− Voltage transformers
Reduce voltages/ currents of HV system to low values

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− Current transformers
− FOR PROTECTIVE RELAYS, MEASURENTS DEVICES, METERING etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 11
ng
ni
Dry transformer

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 12
ng
ni
Dry transformer

ai
Tr
P
IF
Cast resin type
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 13
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 14
ng
ni
Transformers installation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Oil immersed transformers located outdoor.


Co

Dry type transformers located indoor

 Oil immersed distribution transformers separated by walls


(onshore) or fences (offshore) and protected against rain falls or
direct sun rays by a removable roof.
Fencing and roof shall ensure natural transformer ventilation.

 When required, transformers shall be separated from process


area by a fireproof wall. For onshore installation an oil‐receiving
pit shall be built under each transformer and shall be connected

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
to an oily water drainage system.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 15
ng
ni
Transformers installation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Minimum clearance for transformer connections shall be 1000mm


Co

(cables not included), and 850mm for the other sides.

 Access to transformer bay shall be obtained via a lockable‐


screened door.
Interlocking device shall be provided between access to
transformer plug‐in terminals and isolating devices.

 Neutral earthing resistances shall be located in safe area and as


close as possible to the transformers.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 16
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

5.2 ELECTRICAL SWITCHGEAR

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 17
ng
ni
Switchgear

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Switchgear: apparatus (circuit breaker, contactor, switch…).


Co

 Switchboard: assembly of cubicles.


 Cubicles: metallic enclosure incorporating apparatus and
auxiliaries.
 Switchboard (HV and LV) may be of:
• fixed type
• withdrawable type

 Fixed type: maintenance generally requires switchboard


shutdown.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Withdrawable type: the faulty apparatus can be extracted from
the switchboard, limiting the shut down to the faulty equipment.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 18
ng
ni
Switchgear

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A withdrawable unit is made of several compartments (metal


Co

clad) including: bus‐bar, extractible circuit breaker, cable


compart, control compart.

 A withdrawable unit can be:


• in service (power + control = ON)
• in test (power = OFF; control = ON)
• out (power + control = OFF)

 Test position can be padlocked:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• padlocking system is associated with the work permit system to
prevent maloperation

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 19
ng
ni
HV Switchgear

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Compartments description
Co

1 4
4 1 1 Busbar

2 Cables 3

3 3 CB

4 Control
2

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
2

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 20
ng
ni
High voltage cubicle – Withdrawable type

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
Busbar
rig
py

LV compartment
Co

Withdrawable 
circuit breaker

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Cable 
compartment

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 21
ng
ni
Circuit breaker – Withdrawable type

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 22
ng
ni
High voltage cubicle – Withdrawable type

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Low Voltage 
Busbar
py

compartment
Co

Digital multifunction relay

Circuit breaker

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Cable compartment

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 23
ng
ni
High voltage cubicle – Installation 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 24
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 25
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 26
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 27
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 28
ng
ni
High voltage cubicle – Fixed type

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Switch‐disconnector Busbar
py

LV Compartment
Co

Circuit 
breaker

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Cables

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 29
ng
ni
HV Switchgear

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 HV CIRCUIT BREAKER:
Co

• SF6 or Vacuum?… A lengthy debate!


• Higher current rating requested.
• Higher SCC requested (interconnection of 2 power plants, 70kA+,
11kV).
• Cubicle with 2 contactors appreciated.
• Compactness is mandatory.
• Very high SCC requires use of "Current limiting pyrotechnic
device" (Pyrobreaker).
• tc less than 5 ms against 60/70ms for CB.
• Scc = 100kA against 50 kA at 6.6/11 kV.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 30
ng
ni
LV Switchgear 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Arrangement: 2 incoming + 1 bus tie CB’s (coupling is NO).


Co

 Dual feeder arrangement (two half bus bar) and motor feeder on
both sides.

 Cable connection preference is from bottom (technical void) and


rear or front.

 Drawer:
• isolator switch + fuse + contactor + thermal relay.
• (less expensive and bulky) to be compared to circuit beaker +
contactor + thermal relay.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 31
ng
ni
Smart switchboard – Communicating Swb

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Interest is limited for TOTAL:


Co

• Rapid obsolescence of "components" with years.


• Interface with the process control system (INST) is best with
remote I/O per column or group of cubicles (supplied by the PCS
Vendor).
• I/O components may evolve with years, but the Swb will remain the
same.
• Easier FAT/ Commissionning.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 32
ng
ni
Low Voltage Switchboard

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 33
ng
ni
Low Voltage Switchgear Drawers – 1/2‐1‐2‐3 modules

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 34
ng
ni
Low Voltage Switchboard

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 35
ng
ni
Motor Control Center (M.C.C.)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 36
ng
ni
400 V Distribution Switchboard

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 37
ng
ni
400 V Motor Control Center

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 38
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

5.3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS)

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 39
ng
ni
Power Management (ECS)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ECS = Electrical Control System


Co

 Aim: Control of power distribution and power generation


systems.

 The main purpose of the ECS is to be an aid to operators to


facilitate control, supervision and monitoring of the network.

 Failure of the ECS must not stop operation of any part of the
power generation and distribution systems.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 40
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Main Functions include:


Co

• Data acquisition and display of power generation and power


distribution parameters such as remote closing of circuit breakers
from a central control point (control room or an electrical technical
room). Safety requirements ensured by direct acting on devices
(e.g. protection relays acting on circuit breakers) which are
themselves not linked to the ECS. Load shedding.
• Re‐acceleration and restarting.
• Source automatic transfer.
• Data storage and reporting.
• Display of alarms.
• Event recording and parameter trending.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Interface with Integrated Control and Safety System (ICSS).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 41
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The ECS shall be capable of interfacing with all the equipment of


Co

the power generation and distribution systems (i.e. control


panels of turbine/emergency generating sets, HV, LV
switchboards and other switchgear, UPS cubicles, etc.).

 Animated display of power generation and distribution system,


data acquired and provide operator/machine (interface VDU
based system at the central control point).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 42
ng
ni
ICSS General Architecture

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 43
ng
ni
ECS General Architecture

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 44
ng
ni
ECS Interfaces

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Data
ICSS ECS
Co

Data and control


Load sharing
ICSSPMS
Load sharingSynchro (wired)
ESD

Load sharing

UCP System AC network


DC network Supply CB control and
protectionorder

Other generator
Supply unit

Supply

Data and wired Data and wired

Prime mover Output power


Auxiliaries Generator

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Limit of supply

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 45
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

5.4 DC AND AC SOURCES

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 46
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Disturbances on electrical systems:


Co

 Partial or total power failure (outage) may occur on an electical system due to
unavailibility of power supply (public utility or own generation)
 The solution consists on having an emergency diesel generator which will supply the
essential loads.
 But this emergency diesel generator may have a failure (refuse to start!)
 To supply vital loads special power sources must be provided either DC or AC.
 It also may happen that the normal power supply be subject to voltage disturbances
(voltage drop, voltage dip, short power cut, overvoltage harmonics) which distort the
voltage sinus wave or frequency fluctuations, etc.
 Several type of consumers are sensitive to voltage variations
• Motor  torque T = kU² (Induction)
If there is a 20% voltage drop then motor torque = 0.8² = 0.64 TN = 64% of rated
torque only, this may lead to a motor tripping (depending of resistive torque
applied)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Contactor = tripping when voltage drop = 30% (supplied at AC)
• Computers = disturbances, and sometimes data losses

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 47
ng
ni
AC Emergency power

ai
Tr
P
IF
Emergency power supply
ht
rig

 In normal operation «A» is closed and «B» is open


py
Co

 In case of normal power supply failure, detected by a mini voltage relay, diesel
engine starting is initiated; when the emergency diesel generator runs at
nominal speed and gives rated frequency and rated voltage at generator
terminals (after 15 to 30 seconds) then «B» closes and «A» open

Alternate source is generally a diesel generator

A B

 The essential switchboard is re‐energised, and the essential loads are then

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
restarted one by one or by groups of loads (automatically or sometimes
manually) to avoid a too high voltage drop during the restarting period.
• The largest motor to restart is a sizing factor for the generator
• During motor starting many kVA’s but few kW’s
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 48
ng
ni
DC Sources

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

Dc sources
rig
py

 Based on batteries of accumulators recharged by battery chargers a high availability is


Co

generally required for vital loads power supply.


 Redundancy of
• Battery chargers (2 instead of 1)
• Battery of accu (2 sets insead of 1)
 Battery charger includes:
• Input transformer ‐ rectifier (diodes bridge) ‐ regulation device.
 Battery of accumulators:
• Positive and negative plates immerged in an electrolyte (liquid) within an enclosure
(metallic or plastic) association in series and parallel to get required voltages and
currents
 Battery types
Nickel cadmium (Ni Cad) Electrolyte is potash
• Life duration up to 15/20 y
• Allows for a complete discharge
• Open type: separate room with ventilation (H2 emission)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Sealed type = No maintenance (Saft ‐ Vo) ‐ No separate room ‐ High cost
• High reliability
• Full discharge required 2 ‐ 3 times a year

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 49
ng
ni
Battery description

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 50
ng
ni
DC Sources

ai
Tr
P
IF
Lead acid (electrolyte is sulphuric acid)
ht
rig
py

 Open/ vented type:


Co

• Life duration 5/10 y


• Discharge must be stopped before full discharge
• High maintenance
• Separate room with ventilation (hydrogen emission)

 Sealed type (recombination type ‐referred as VRLA =valve regulated lead acid)

as there is a valve , there is H2 release !


• Life duration 5 y and sometimes less !
• Sudden death ! (open circuit)
• No maintenance (no water addition …)
• Lower cost than NiCad
• Special battery/ charger (regulation issue)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• No dedicated room but minimum ventilation required

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 51
ng
ni
DC Power supply

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 52
ng
ni
Battery arrangement 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 53
ng
ni
Battery operation 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 At the end of the battery recharging period, H2 gas is emitted


Co

 When a battery is recharged at an excessive rate (overcharging),


an explosive gas mixture of hydrogen and oxygen may be
produced(risk of battery case bursting)

 In extreme cases, the battery acid may spray violently from the
casing of the battery and cause injury

 It may also cause damage to the charger or device in which the


overcharged battery is later used

 Additionally, disposing of a battery in fire may cause an explosion


as steam builds up within the sealed case of the battery.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 54
ng
ni
Battery room ventilation & maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Batteries must be installed in separate rooms unless they are of


Co

the recombination type

 Ventilation must be provided in battery room to bring fresh air at


least equals to: 0.05 N I m3/h
• N = number of battery elements
• I = maximum current during charging

 This avoids to use Ex equipment in the battery room, but often


precautions lead to adopt Ex equipment (battery fan motor,
lighting, …)

 Maintenance:use of no sparking tools to avoid any sparks (fall of

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
tool) use of individual protective clothing to avoid risk of acid
projection, gloves, gogles, also wash eyes must be provided .

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 55
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Check level of electrolyte and specific gravity


Co

 Remember that voltage cell depends on electrolyte concentration

 A higher specific gravity gives :

*more capacity

*shorter life ( due to corrosion )

*smaller footprint

*higher momentary discharge rates

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 56
ng
ni
AC UPS Sources

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 AC Sources (AC ‐ UPS)


Co

 UPS = Uninterrupted Power Supply


UPS Package made of bat charger + bat of accumul + inverter
Bat charger = AC to DC
Inverter = DC to AC
 In case of any disturbances on the normal power supply and/ or the essential power
supply (E. D. G.), Vital consumers are supplied by the inverter itself supplied by the
battery which does not « see » the voltage variations or voltage cuts depending on the
battery autonomy. Vital loads (emergency loads) shall remain energised during the
autonomy duration. Autonomy depends on the required service.
 EG:
• Electrical control = 1/2 h
• Instrumentation = 1/2 to 1 h or more
• Fire and gas =2h

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Telecom = 24 h
• Navigational aids = 96 h (International regulation)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 57
ng
ni
Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 58
ng
ni
UPS + Static switch + bypass

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 59
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

5.5 CABLES

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 60
ng
ni
Electrical cables – General presentation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

GENERAL
Co

 A cable is made up of a number of conductors, electrically separated, but mechanically


assembled, and generally enclosed in a protective sheath.
 Electrical cables can be classified into two categories:
• Power Cables
Used for power transmission/supply (current I) under a certain voltage U
• Control cables
Used for data transmission
 A cable mainly comprises:
• Conductor
• Insulation
• Mechanical protection
 Regarding the assembly, different types of cables can be considered:
• Single core cable (1 x 300 mm²)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Three core cable (3 x 70 mm²)
• Multicore cable (19 x 1.5 mm²)
• Multipair, multitriple

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 61
ng
ni
Electrical cables – General presentation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

CABLE SPECIFICATION AND CONSTRUCTION


py
Co

 Conductor
• Material Plain copper
Tinned copper (extra cost = + 7 %)
Aluminium
Aluminium is cheaper than copper if the price of 1 kg of copper is twice as much the price of 0.5 kg
of aluminium.

• Section Circular
Sectoral

• Type Solid
Stranded
 Insulating materials
• Paper Insulation: now rarely used for LV
• PVC (polyvinyl chloride): LV and HV up to 10 kV (toxic gases emission under fire)
• PE (polyethelene): HV and EHV

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• EPR/EPDM (ethylene propylene rubber or similar): LV and HV for flexible cable (burn)
• LPE (cross‐linked polyethelene): LV and HV up to 36 kV
• Silicone rubber: LV for high temperatures (fire resisting cables)

Insulation thickness is defined in the standards according to voltage


Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 62
ng
ni
Electrical cables – General presentation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Screening
Co

• Metallic layer surrounding the cores either individually or collectively.


 Assembly / Inner covering and fillers
• The three isolated cores are assembled helically with inner covering and
fillers made of extruded or lapped material
 Metallic sheath
• Lead sheath (used as a protection against aromatic hydrocarbons)
 Metallic armour
Mechanical protection:
• Tape armour (steel, galvanized steel, aluminium or aluminium alloy)
• Round wire armour (steel, galvanized steel, aluminium or copper)
 Oversheath
Mechanical and chemical protection of the cables:
• Thermoplastic compound (PVC or polyethylene)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Elastomenc compound (polychloroprene PCP, or similar polymers)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 63
ng
ni
Electrical cables – General presentation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 64
ng
ni
Electrical cables – General presentation

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

CABLE INSTALLATION
Co

 Lengths are contractually defined with the manufacturer with tolerances ‐ 0%;+3 %
 The recommendations applicable to the installation of cables are:
• a minimum bending radius (depending on cable type and diameter)
• a minimum cable spacing between the different types (derating factor )
• the studies of the routing shall include the safety aspects
• cable laying requires a large manpower at the same time.
FIRE RESISTANT CABLE
 The different types are:
• flame‐retardant cables: does not propagate the flame when submitted to a fire
• fire resisting cables: does not burn for a defined duration when submitted to a fire.
HYDROCARBON RESISTANT CABLES
 The two types of hydrocarbons are:
• aliphatic hydrocarbons (crude oil, lubricating oil, paraffin, ...) protection by a
specific PVC sheath.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene and derivated): protection by a lead sheath
BUSDUCT
 In case of transmission of large current the use of busduct recommended, busduct
consists of copper bar assembled into a metallic enclosure
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 65
ng
ni
Fire resisting cables 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

FIRE RESISTING CABLE (IEC 60331)


Co

 Standards define the maximun temperature withstanding (cable integrety


kept) as well as the duration
 Example: IEC 60331 ... 750° C during 3h (corresponding to fire in a building but
not to an industrial fire especially in the O&G field)
 As an example the Operator Total requires a test at 1000°Cc during 30 minutes
(this time is sufficient to manage all the safety procedures such as the
emergency shut down and evacuation)
 Construction:
• Cables can have Silicone rubber insulation or a mica glass tape with EPR or
XLPE insulation. The inner sheath is made of a low smoke fire retardant
compound.
• MICC (Mineral Insulated Copper Cables) are made of a copper tube filled
with magnesia. A copper conductor is placed inside the tube.
• MICC have special connecting devices and are very sensitive to moisture

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
(strict precautions to be taken during installation, if not major risk of poor
insulation resistance!)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 66
ng
ni
Flame retardant cables

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

FLAME RETARDANT CABLE (IEC 60332)


Co

 This type of cable does not propagate flame during a fire (it burns
locally) but may be destroyed by a fire

 Two categories exist:


• cable does not propagate flame when only one cable is
installed
• cable does not propagate flame when cables are laid in bunch

 Flame retardant properties are checked with the Oxygen index (a


minimum factor = 30 as per ASTM D 2863 is required)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 The type of support (metallic cable tray, or « plastic » cable tray)
plays an important role in the fire propagation behaviour

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 67
ng
ni
Fumes & gas emission during a fire  

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Current produces heat as a function of current squared resistance


Co

W = R I²
 Current that exceeds the rating of the conductor cross section
increases temperature of the insulation sheath,which decreases
dramatically cable life duration
 Excessive temperature insulation sheath may lead to a fire
 During a fire all the polymer materials of the various sheathes
emit fumes and noxious gases (mainly chlorine)
 Requirements for a minimum production are defined by the acid
gas generation factor HCL below (17 for example at Total)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Cables with no (or very low)fumes and gas emission are called
« Zero halogen » cables

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 68
ng
ni
Zero halogen cables 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Zero halogen cables are made with insulation fillers, inner and
Co

outer sheath made of suitable elastomers or thermoplastic


materials

 Requirements are as follows: (eg: Total specification)


• Acid gas generation HCL: < 0.5% as per IEC 60754
• Maximum smoke density: Dm < 250 as per ASTM E662
• Smoke in chamber (4 mn) VOF4 < 150 as per ASTM E662
• Oxygen index > 30 asper ASTM D2863
• Transmittance as per IEC 61034

 Zero Halogen cables are mainly used for buildings, tunnels, etc.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 69
ng
ni
What you have to know about cables

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Budget :
py
Co

Cable is a significant expenditure within electrical budget (>20%)

 Planning
Takes time to be defined (specification + list + calculations + drum split)

Takes time to deliver (all industries need cable)

 Technical
 Sizing is no so simple as it could be expected (power, length, voltage drop, short-circuit ,installation, safety, …)

 Cables are not pipes welded to each other, it is delivered in one length

 Rerouting at a late stage can be catastrophic (all cables too short)

 It is the most exposed electrical equipment (number, length, locations):

−Armoured or not ?

−Chemical & UV exposure

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
−Fire resistance / retardance

− Fume & gas emissions

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 3 70
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

6. Sub‐Station Arrangement

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4
ng
ni
Electrical Room design

ai
Tr
P
IF
One basic rule at Total!
ht
rig
py

 No switchgear outdoor or when no other solution are feasible


Co

(corrosion, operation, maintenance!!!)


• All switchgear in air conditioned rooms (pressurized when in
hazardous areas, or dusty / sand wind areas).
• Compactness of cubicles/panels, is a must!… mini footprint.
• Possible expansion at both end is recommended.
• Segregation between NORMAL – ESSENTIAL – EMERGENCY
equipment (wall fire proofing is different).
• Space allocation for future expansion mini = 25 %.
• Cable connections from bottom (technical void/false floor) – floor
openings at design stage.
• Power transformers (oil) located outdoor (safety, heat).
• Small power transformers (dry type only) located indoor.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Batteries located in dedicated battery rooms (ventilation, H2
detectors).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 2
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 3
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 4
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 5
ng
ni
Electrical Technical Room Preliminary Arrangement

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Homo Homo
Equip Inc BB  BB  Inc Equip
py

PyroBreaker polar SH Mot Mot Mot Trans Trans BT Trans Trans Mot Mot polar SH
Spare GTG Meas Meas GTG Spare

Bat UPS  24 
Trans  Trans 
Co

Bat UPS  230V
Bat UPS  24 
V
24 VDC
DB
Interface 
DG  CP SH   CP SH   CP Package 
Inc BT Inc Cabinet

24 VDC

BatPAGA
BC
LDB ELDB HT DB Interface 
Package 
Cabinet
DG

Bat UPS  230V
Inc BT Inc
Inc

24 VDC

Bat  NAVAID
BC
Potential Spare Space CB

Entry 
400/230V 400/230V 400/230V
HVAC HVAC HVAC Transfo. Transfo. Transfo. UPS 
230V
UPS 
230V
DB
UPS 
NAVAID
DC SYSTEM BC PAGA
Safety P
230V

Transformer

Transformer
Earthing

Earthing
11/0.415 kV 11/0.415 kV
11/0.415 kV 11/0.415 kV 11/0.415 kV 11/0.415 kV Transformer Transformer
Transformer Transformer Transformer Transformer SuperHeater SuperHeater

Notes:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
1‐ Technical Room arrangement is based on the 4 GTG configuration. 
2‐GTG Auxiliary DBs located inside the  GTG Technical Room
3‐ All DCS, ESD, FGS, Metering and relevant DBs are located in a separate Technical Room
4‐ Soft Starters have not  been considered for the biggest HV Motors (to be further evaluated at the basic stage)
5‐ Substation Internal Dimensions:
Scale 1/100
L x W x H (mm)  29500 x 9000 x 4500 mm (including the false floor) 1cm = 1m
False Floor 700 mm

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 6
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

TCP + Excitation + Protection  TCP hyd.  Air Comp  SAS


Cubicles Start CP

DB SP, light
TCP + Excitation + Protection  TCP hyd.  Air Comp  Air Comp 
Cubicles Start CP CP

6.22 x 16 = 100

MCC Starter 
HVAC HVAC MCC GTG A MCC GTG B A/ B

TCP hyd.  TCP hyd. 
Start
TCP + Excitation + Protection 

TCP + Excitation + Protection 

TCP + Excitation + Protection 
SAS

Start
Cubicles

Cubicles

Cubicles

Air Comp  Air Comp 
CP
7.65 x 14 = 107

Air Comp 

DB SP, light
CP

CP

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
MCC Starter 
HVAC HVAC MCC GTG A MCC GTG B A/ B

Scale 1/100
1cm = 1m

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 7
ng
ni
Pre‐fabricated electrical room

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CONCEPT
Co

• To build a complete electrical /control integrated room with all the


associated ancillaries, at a cabin manufacturer premises, onshore,
to test (FAT) all the systems before shipment.

• The cabin manufacturer is selected among Vendors having a


recognized electrical competence.

• Main contractors have generally a limited electrical competence


and installation of electrical & control rooms is often a difficult task
for them with disappointing results for the Operator and many
discussions during design and construction (!).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 8
ng
ni
Pre‐fabricated electrical room

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Transport requirements by road impose maximum dimensions and


Co

weight. Transport by river may also be envisaged.

• Dimensions increase may be obtained by juxtaposition of 2‐3


cabins having one temporary partition. After assembling on site the
temporary partition is removed.

• Mini module can be constructed with such an arrangement (e.g.


onshore arctic area).

• Cabins may be designed for installation in hazardous areas or safe


areas.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Cabins may be of metallic type or GRP type (with limited
dimensions).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 9
ng
ni
Application

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Satellite supplied from either local generation or centralized


Co

generation: (typically 6.6 kV – 250kVA).

 Main data (hazardous area design).


• A60 SOLAS classification (roof, walls, floor and doors).
• Air conditioned to limit temperature and humidity conditions.
• Indoor equipment protected by internal pressurization.
• Cabin designed to be lifted and transported in one piece, complete
with all equipment, in four points and to be supported as well as at
the four opposite corners. (Padeyes and speeder frame).
• Four skidding padeyes (one at each corner) welded at the base of

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
the cabin structure for cabin skidding.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 10
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Condenser of the air conditioning system mounted on the roof of


Co

the cabin and dismounted for transport.

• Walls made of steel sheets, 5 mm thick minimum.

• Floor and roof will be made of steel sheets, 6 mm thick minimum.

• Thermal insulation

• False floor on adjustable jacks

• All openings for doors, MCT, HVAC, etc., made in walls, floor, roof
framed to keep the structural integrity.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Doors (staff, materials) air lock.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 11
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Internal partitioning as required (B15) – switch room, control room,


Co

batteries room, transformer in a separated bay area (meshed)


adjacent or completely separated. Mini office, accommodation as
required).
• Safety ladder to get access to the roof.
• Removable hand rail installed on the roof, for staff maintenance
protection.
• HVAC system with fire & gas dampers.
• Fire & Gas detection.
• Fire extinguishing system (CO2 bottles).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Switchboards, control panels, control desk, etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 12
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

7. Electric Motors

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4
ng
ni
Electric motor overview

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Dc motors Ac motors
py
Co

Asynchronous Synchronous Also generator

Squirrel Cage Permanent Magnet
Slip‐ring Motor Wound rotor
Induction Motor (Special application)

Process & utilities  Lifting Applications Large motor > 10 MW


(99%)  (High torque) And
Very large motor: 100 MW today!

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
‐ Low speed or very low speed motors are generally synchronous
‐ Dc motors for variable speed drive (in the past) & drilling

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 14
ng
ni
Components of an induction motor (squirrel cage)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 15
ng
ni
Induction motor

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1. Stator (fixed part)


Co

• Frame
− ALUMINIUM ALLOY (small ratings).
− Steel sheet welded (large ratings).
− Cast iron (average ratings).
• Magnetic circuit
− Circular iron sheet (silicium) with grooves to accommodate the
windings.
• Windings
− Copper wire or flat bar wrapped with mica tapes and/or glass (for HV
motors) housed into the grooves.
− Epoxy resin impregnation (global, vacuum) then polymerization in an
oven (for HV motor).
− LV motor insulation is enamelled.
− Insulation system is the key factor for motor life duration. Life

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
duration depends on temperatures reached versus insulation material
temperature design (efficiency of the cooling).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 16
ng
ni
Induction motor

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Terminal box
Co

− At the top and orientable in the 4 directions (LV). LV motors have 6


terminals to allow star or d coupling.
− Cable connections through a cable gland – use of lugs for cable
conductor connections.
− Large terminal box for HV motors located on side.
• Bearings
− Ball rollers, cylindrical rollers – grease system.
− Sleeve bearings with oil lubrification by ring or forced lubrification
(coming from the driven machine lub. system) for large motors.
• Accessories
− Resistance temperature detectors (RTD’s) to monitor winding
temperature.
− Heating resistance to avoid moisture when motor is standby.
− Sometimes RTD’s or thermocouples for sleeve bearings temperature

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
monitoring.
− Sometimes: vibration sensors on bearings.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 17
ng
ni
Induction motor

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

2. ROTOR
Co

• Shaft.
• Magnetic circuit: circular iron sheets with grooves to accommodate copper/or alu
bare bars.
• Windings: bars are inserted in grooves and brazed at both ends with a ring →
«squirrel cage».
Between rotor and stator an air gap (a few millimetres).
Robust motor as per design (no insulating materials on the rotor).
3. COOLING
• Fans on shaft → self ventilated.
• Motor ventilated (fan driven by an auxiliary motor).
• Air cooler (air to air heat exchanger) «tube motor».
• Water cooler (air to water heat exchanger); soft water or sea water.
Limit between air and water cooling < 4 mw = air
> 4mw = water (except in desert).
4. INSTALLATION

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Common structure (slides) with the driven machine.
• Fixation by bolting on civil engineering.
• Coupling by pulley/belt or coupling box.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 18
ng
ni
Low Voltage Motor

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Fan cover
Co

Fan
Terminal box

End shield End shield

Outer bearing cover
Inner bearing cover

Bearing

Inner bearing cover

Outer bearing cover
Frame

Bearing
Shaft

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 19
ng
ni
Low Voltage Motor

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Flameproof enclosure EEx de
py
Co

Cast iron, sizes 80 – 400, 0.55 – 630 kW

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 20
ng
ni
Low Voltage Motor

ai
Tr
P Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC)
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 21
ng
ni
High Voltage Motor Stator

ai
Tr
P (during construction)
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 22
ng
ni
High Voltage Motor Stator completed

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 23
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Insulation system:
py
Co

• MicalasticR insulation system (VPI)


↑ Highest quality insulation
 Features:
• Also Converter operation • High switching and reversing strength
• Excellent corona shielding • Long lifetime
• High thermal durability

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Stator winding
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 24
ng
ni
Motor cooling

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Air outlet

Air 
inlet

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ventilation circuit: Air‐ / Air‐Cooling (1RQ4)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 25
ng
ni
Motor cooling

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ventilation circuit: Air‐ / Water‐Cooling (1RN4)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 26
ng
ni
Motor cooling

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Air outlet

Air inlet
on the side 

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ventilation circuit: Open Circuit Cooling (1RA4)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 27
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Design: Laminated rotor core with copper bars and short‐circuit‐rings 
py
Co

shrunk onto a spider shaft

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Asynchronous squirrel cage rotor

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 28
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Design: Laminated rotor core with rotor winding shrunk onto the
Co

shaft.

 Slipring housing:
• Within the bearings, located at NDE.
• Separated from the motor interior.
• Common ventilation motor interior / slip ring housing, air
recirculation into the motor interior via filter.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Asynchronous slipring rotor
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 29
ng
ni
Monitoring devices and equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Resistance or dial thermometer (hot air)


py
Co

Slot resistance thermometer (stator winding): standard design


Resistance or dial thermometer (cold air)
Shaft rotation pulse transmitter
Resistance or dial thermometer (Bearings)

Shaft vibration measurement

Shock puls measuring method (measuring nipple standard design)


Leakage water detector standard design
Throttle valve
Pressure gauge Oil inlet
Flowmeter with monitor

Thermometer bore Oil outlet


Sight glass

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 30
ng
ni
Efficiency and power factor vs. motor output

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

PkW 1.1 3 30 132 250 1000


rig
py
Co

% 75 80 90 93 94 95

Cos  0.79 0.82 0.86 0.88 0.87 0.89

  and cos ø vary with the load applied to the motor


 EG = FOR A 22 kW MOTOR:
load factor = 0 % cos ø = 0.17
25 % = 0.55
50 % = 0.73
75 % = 0.80
100 % = 0.85
→ DURING STARTING A MOTOR HAS A VERY LOW P. F (cos j) = 0.1‐ 0.2

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 31
ng
ni
Induction motor main data

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Output: below 160 kW = LV


Co

 Between 160 and 250 kW, economical study


 Above 250 kW = HV
 Direct on line starting (DOL) – generally
 Starting devices for large motors at fixed speed
 Voltage: LV = 400 V – 660 V considered
HV = (3.3) – 6.6 – 11 – 13.8 kV (60 hz)
 Synchronous speed: 1500 rpm preferred
 Single phase motor below 0.37 kW
 Direct drive (no gear) or through a gearbox, or a belt / pulley

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
system

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 32
ng
ni
Markings and Direction

ai
Tr
P IEC 60034‐8   Star (Y) connection
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
230VD, 400VY       Uph = 400/(√3) ≈ 230V
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 33
ng
ni
Markings and Direction

ai
Tr
P IEC 60034‐8  Delta (∆) connection
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
400VD, 690VY                Uph = 690/(√3) ≈ 400V
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 34
ng
ni
Direct starting

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Direct starting, DOL (Direct On Line)


Co

 Is the most simple method of starting

 As the name indicates the motor is started by connecting it


directly to the mains supply (On Line)
• The voltage from the mains is supplied to the winding of the motor
as soon as it is connected

What is the disadvantage?

 High starting current of between 4–8 times of the nominal current

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 35
ng
ni
Star‐delta starting

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 This method can only be use if the motor is to be connected in


Co

DELTA
• A code D‐wound motor (400VD and 690VY) can Y/D‐started at 400V
• A code S‐wound motor (230VD and 400VY) can Y/D‐started at 230V

 The motor is first connected in: STAR (the wrong connection),


then it is reconnected to DELTA (the correct connection)

 Advantage
• The starting current is reduced to 1/3 of the DOL starting current
(as the voltage over the winding is reduced with √3 (from eg 400 to
230) and the resistance is changed)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Disadvantage
• The motor torque is also reduced to 1/3 of the nominal torque

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 36
ng
ni
Y/D curves

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 37
ng
ni
Star‐delta starting

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

If using Y/D‐start you have to consider the following:


Co

 All 6 terminals has to be taken form the terminal box to a switch


board
 When reconnecting the motor, the current will increase or the
motor speed will drop
• The reconnection has to be as close to max speed as possible in
order to limit the current increase or the drop in speed

 The motors can only be Y/D started if it use with no load or very
low load
 The motor has to be connected correct when it is being
reconnected, otherwise it will change direction (= break and DOL

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
start)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 38
ng
ni
Starting with soft starter

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DOL start is a very direct and hard method it can cause current peaks and big
Co

mechanical wear
 Y/D start can if not selected correctly, give unwanted current peaks or cause
rotor heating
 Soft start gives “a soft start” without the problems known form the other types
of start
 There are different kinds of soft starters
• with transformers
• with serial resistors
• with different kinds of power electronics
 No matter what kind of soft starter is used the disadvantages of DOL or Y/D
start will be removed or reduced;
 This is done by reducing the motor voltage, causing the current to be reduced

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• NOTE, the torque of the motor is also reduced
• NOTE, when using soft starter we still have to respect the maximum
moment of inertia which the motor can accelerate

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 39
ng
ni
Derating factors (motor output)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

 Standard ambient temperature: ‐20°C to +40°C

 Standard altitude: 1000 m above sea level

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 40
ng
ni
Variable Speed Drive (VSD)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A V.S.D. equipment is made of:


Co

• an input transformer (optional)


• a rectifier bridge
• an inverter bridge
• an inductance (optional)
• harmonic filters (optional)
• motor (induction or synchronous)

 Oil & Gas plant: drilling platforms use DC drives (mud pumps…).
Production plants use small AC drives for pumping (onshore),
medium size drives for ESP (Electro Submersible Pumps) and
sometimes large drives for gas compressors (40MW!), or water
injection.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Petrochemical plants use VSD for extruders (10 MW), mixers, etc.
Refineries have very few VSD applications.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 41
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 42
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

8. Lighting System

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4
ng
ni
Lighting

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1. Normal system: fed from normal distribution boards


Co

2. Essential system: fed from essential distribution boards


• 100% of lighting inside technical rooms.
• 30 % minimum of total lighting in other areas.

3. Emergency system: Selected luminaries' of the above essential system, which


illuminate escape routes, emergency exits and ladders shall have an integrated
Ni‐Cd battery and shall be category 2.

 Inside technical rooms, fluorescent luminaries'’ category 2 with integrated Ni‐


Cd battery to provide 90 minutes illumination of panels/switchboards used for
re‐starting operation.

 High Pressure Sodium (HPS) floodlights for wellhead, boat landing and work
over areas lighting.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 No outdoor lighting switch on offshore platform unless otherwise specified.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 44
ng
ni
Lighting system (industry)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Lighting system is generally split into 3 sub‐systems:


Co

• normal lighting supplied from normal distribution boards


• essential lighting supplied from essential distribution boards,
themselves supplied from another source of power
• emergency lighting includes luminaries' suitably located to
illuminate escape routes, emergency exits and areas where safety
teams (firemen…)may intervene

 Emergency lighting (sometimes called safety lightning) is


submitted to national regulations

 Essential lighting (sometimes called standby lighting) is generally


not submitted to regulations but only to private rules (owner)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 45
ng
ni
Lighting system (industry)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 As an example the rule at Total (Exploration/Production) for essential lighting


Co

is:
• 100% of lighting inside buildings (control room, electrical substation,
emergency generator room, etc.)
• 30% minimum of total outdoor lighting (suitably defined)
 Essential lighting is fed by the « emergency diesel generator »
 Emergency luminaries' are with fluorescent tubes with integrated Ni‐Cd
battery providing 90 minutes illumination
 They are suitable for explosive atmospheres (category 2 as per the ATEX
directive)
 Inside buildings they are located for re‐stating operation (in front of
panels/switchboards)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Another alternative is to have the emergency luminaries' with no integrated
battery but supplied from a centralized source

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 46
ng
ni
Lighting system (industry)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Solution less expensive for luminaries' but requiring fire resisting


Co

cables (expensive) for cable protection during a fire!

 Emergency luminaries' is a battery‐backed lighting device that


comes on automatically when a building or an area experiences a
power outage

 They bear the green/white “exit” sign and are also found in
commercial, public and residential buildings

 Portable hand lamps are also provided in technical buildings with

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
several hours of autonomy

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 4 47
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

9. Electrical Maintenance

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5
ng
ni
General considerations

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Aim of Maintenance is to keep electrical equipment in good


Co

operating conditions for following purposes:

• Safety

• Prevention from failure to ensure operation continuity

• Preservation of COMPANY assets

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 2
ng
ni
Safety

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Visual inspections shall be done periodically to prevent operators


Co

from electrical hazards

• Earthing and bonding shall be ensured

• No live parts shall be accessible

• Electrical safety equipment condition and related instructions shall


be checked

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 3
ng
ni
Prevention from failure

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Operating conditions are likely to affect performance and life


Co

duration of electrical equipment


• Dust accumulation or defect of ventilation prevent from normal
heat dissipation.
• Moisture reduces dielectric strength of many insulating materials
and increase the risk of short‐circuit.
• Corrosion destroys integrity of equipment and enclosures.
• Loose connections involve overheating and destruction of
equipment terminations.
• Wrong settings or defect of “protection relays” can involve
damages on equipment.

 Three types of Maintenance are implemented

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 4
ng
ni
Type of maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Curative maintenance
Co

• Consist in repairing equipment after failure.

 Preventive maintenance
• Routine checks and works have to be carried out, following a specific
periodicity and procedure for each type of equipment according to
the manufacturer ‘s instructions (maintenance manual)
• Preventive Maintenance consists mostly, in visual inspection of
equipment, cleaning, tightness of connections, insulation resistance
measurements and “protection relay” tests.

 Predictive maintenance
• Implemented when stop of equipment is not allowed.
• Maintenance is depending on measurements and particular

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
inspections to anticipate failures
− Vibration analysis on rotating machines
− Infra‐red thermography on terminations of transformers, switchboards
and overhead lines
− Dielectric oil analysis on transformers
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 5
ng
ni
Preservation of company assets

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A good Maintenance is a manner for taking care of COMPANY


Co

investments by extending as much as possible the life duration of


equipment.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 6
ng
ni
Operation‐work permit

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electrical maintenance people are also responsible for the proper


Co

operation of the electrical system including switching on/off of


various equipment.

 For safety purposes the follow‐up of operating procedures is


mandatory.

 Procedures include a work permit request prior to any operation


of maintenance.

 To protect workers, an “Isolation” of the equipment related to


the work permit shall be carried‐out.

 Main electrical switching devices shall be locked in open position

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
(disconnection shall be visible).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 7
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Padlock shall be fitted with a tag indicating the number of the


Co

work permit and the name of the person responsible for the job.

 This person only, will be allowed to request the de‐isolation of


the equipment after completion of the job.

 According to the type of task to be carried out, various worker


qualification are required.

 A qualified person is a person who has been authorized after an


adequate training, to undertake certain works and has received
(on successful completion) an “authorization certificate”
(delivered by his Employer).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 The authorization certificate indicates the various levels of works
(HV, LV electrical isolation permit, etc.) which can be undertaken
by the person.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 8
ng
ni
Regulation requirements 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Every work activity, including operation, use and maintenance of


Co

an electrical system and work near an electrical system, shall be


carried out in such a manner as not to give rise, so far as is
reasonably practicable, to danger.

 Any equipment provided for the purpose of protecting persons at


work on or near electrical equipment shall be suitable for the use
for which it is provided, be maintained in a condition suitable for
that use, and be properly used.

 Work on or near these equipment are fundamental to electrical

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
safety

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 9
ng
ni
Electrical Maintenance 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Regular inspection of electrical equipment is an essential part of


Co

any preventive maintenance programme.

 Records of maintenance, including test results, preferably kept


throughout the working life of an electrical system will enable the
condition of the equipment and the effectiveness of maintenance
policies to be monitored.

 Without effective monitoring, maintenance teams cannot be


certain that the requirement for maintenance has been complied
with.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 10
ng
ni
Electrical Maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 It is preferable that the conductors be made dead before work


Co

starts. In such cases it is essential that the equipment be isolated


according to “isolation” procedures (locking off, etc.).

 The conductors must be proved dead at the point of work before


the work starts.

 Where a test instrument or voltage indicator is used for this


purpose this device should itself be proved preferably
immediately before and immediately after testing the
conductors.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 11
ng
ni
Protective equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Suitable clothing.
Co

 Insulating helmets.

 Goggles and gloves.

 Insulating materials used as fixed or temporary screening to


prevent electric shock and to prevent short circuit between live
conductors or between live conductors and earth.

 Insulating mats and stands to prevent electric shock current via


the feet and insulated tools and insulated test probes.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 12
ng
ni
Protective equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 13
ng
ni
Protective equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Some work, such as fault finding and testing, or live jointing by


Co

the electricity supply industry, may require electrical equipment


to remain energised during the work.

 Particular requirements in terms of protective equipment need to


be applied.

 The operation, maintenance and testing of electrical systems and


equipment should be carried out only by those people who are
competent for the particular class of work.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 14
ng
ni
Work near electrical systems

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 This includes work of a non‐electrical nature where there is a risk


Co

of electrical injury.

 A common example is excavation near to live electric power


cables and work near live overhead power lines, where the risks
can be severe.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 15
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Protective equipment typically includes those special tools,


Co

protective clothing, insulating screening materials, insulating


gloves and floor mats necessary to undertake work safely on live
electrical equipment.

 There are 3 particular requirements of the protective equipment:


• suitable for use
• maintained in that condition
• properly used.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 16
ng
ni
Precautions for work on equipment made dead

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Precautions must be taken to prevent electrical equipment, which


Co

has been made dead in order to prevent danger while work is


carried out on or near that equipment, from becoming electrically
charged during that work if danger may thereby arise.

 Procedures for making the equipment dead involve cutting off


the supply of electrical energy.

 Isolation of the electrical equipment will be necessary Ideally a


means of locking off an isolator can be used. Where such facilities
are not available, the removal of fuses or links and their being
held in safe keeping can provide a secure arrangement if proper

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
control procedures are used.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 17
ng
ni
Precautions for work on equipment made dead

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Presence of electrical energy (electromagnetic induction, mutual


Co

capacitance or stored electrical energy) may have to be guarded


against, for example by applying earthing connections for the
duration of the work (temporary earths).

 The precautions may need to include means of preventing further


accumulation of electrical charge, following initial discharge,
because latent energy may be stored in the system, for example
in the dielectric of high voltage cables. In the case of work upon
high voltage power distribution circuits, isolation procedures
should include the back‐up measure of applying circuit main
earths (primary earths) at points of isolation by means of
purpose‐built facilities.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 18
ng
ni
Written procedures (Permits‐to‐work)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 It is essential that the safety isolation procedures be formalised


Co

in written instructions or house rules.

 They are called “Permits‐to‐work”.

 Properly formulated “permit‐to work” procedures focus the


minds both of those issuing and of those receiving the permits
both on the manner in which the work is to be done and on how
the equipment has been made safe.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 19
ng
ni
Work on or near live conductors

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 There are circumstances in which it is unreasonable for the


Co

equipment to be dead while work proceeds.


 An example of this might be where it was found necessary to
undertake some maintenance, checking or repair on a busy
section of electric railway track where it would be
disproportionately disruptive and costly in many ways for the live
conductors to be isolated for the period of the work.
 Other examples are to be found in the electrical supply industry,
particularly live cable jointing, and in much of the work done on
telephone network connections.
 Equipment users should bear in mind at the time of ordering,
purchase and installation of plant, the manner of operation,

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
maintenance and repair of the electrical equipment which will be
necessary during the life of the plant.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 20
ng
ni
Work on or near live conductors

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 It is recommended that equipment which combines power and


Co

control circuitry should be arranged so that the power circuits are


physically separate and segregated from logic and control circuits
or so placed, recessed or otherwise arranged that the risk of
accidental contact is eliminated.

 Diagnostic work on the low power/voltage circuits may then


proceed with less risk to personnel.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 21
ng
ni
Provisions for work on or near live conductors 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Suitable precautions shall include as appropriate:


Co

• The use of people who are properly trained and


competente to work on live equipment safely
• The provision of adequate information to the person carrying out
the work about the live conductors involved, the associated
electrical system and the foreseeable risks
• The use of suitable tools, including insulated tools, equipment and
protective clothing
• The use of suitable insulated barriers or screens
• The use of suitable instruments and test probes
• Accompaniment by another person or people if the presence of
such person or people could contribute significantly to ensuring
that injury is prevented
• Effective control of any area where there is danger from live

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
conductors by provision of lockable enclosures or barriers, and
warning notices indicating the presence of live conductors

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 22
ng
ni
Emergency resuscitation and first aid

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Notices or placards giving details of emergency resuscitation


Co

procedures in the event of electric shock shall be placed at those


locations where people may be at greater risk of electric shock
(electrical test areas, substations, laboratories, etc.).

 But for resuscitation techniques to be effective, those required to


exercise them must receive proper training and regular practice.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 23
ng
ni
Work near underground cables and overhead power lines

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Precautions should include:


Co

 Mapping, recording and marking on site of cable runs

 Use of cable locating devices

 Safe digging practices

 Overhead power lines may be readily accessible to people


working on elevated platforms, scaffolding or roofs. People
working with tall vehicles such as cranes, lorries or farm
machinery or handling metal ladders, pipes or other long articles
may also be at risk from a flashover or contact with overhead
power lines.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 24
ng
ni
Personnel competence

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 No person shall be engaged in any work activity where technical


Co

knowledge or experience is necessary to prevent danger.

 Employees should be trained and instructed to ensure that they


understand the safety procedures which are relevant to their
work and should work in accordance with any instructions or
rules directed at ensuring safety which have been laid down by
their employer.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 25
ng
ni
Supervision

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The regulation recognises that in many circumstances people will


Co

require to be supervised to some degree where their technical


knowledge or experience is not of itself sufficient to ensure that
they can otherwise undertake the work safely.
The responsibilities of those undertaking the supervision should
be clearly stated to them by those dutyholders who allocate the
responsibilities for supervision and consideration should be given
to stating these responsibilities in writing.
Where the risks involved are low, verbal instructions are likely to
be adequate but as the risk or complexity increase there comes a
point where the need for written procedures becomes important
in order that instructions may be understood and supervised
more rigorously.
In this context, supervision does not necessarily require continual
attendance at the work site, but the degree of supervision and

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
the manner in which it is exercised is for the dutyholders to
arrange to ensure that danger, or as the case may be, injury, is
prevented.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 26
ng
ni
Technical knowledge or experience

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

The scope of “technical knowledge or experience” includes:


Co

 Adequate knowledge of electricity

 Adequate experience of electrical work

 Adequate understanding of the system to be worked on and


practical experience of that class of system

 Understanding of the hazards which may arise during the work


and the precautions which need to be taken

 Ability to recognise at all times whether it is safe for work to


continue.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 5 27
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

10.Offshore aspects

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6
ng
ni
Electrical works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Offshore construction works costs being high, their efficiency being low (time
py

to be multiplied by a factor = 2 to 2.5 against onshore), the trend is to reduce


Co

offshore works at their minimum.


 Technical buildings are prefabricated onshore in a yard (shipbuilding yard) they
are called modules
 Recent trend to build electrical/instrumentation rooms from a different
contractor (competence)
 Lifting considerations determine the maximum module dimensions and weight
(determined at pre‐project stage)
 Buildings include electrical rooms, control rooms, auxiliary rooms (offices,
warehouse, workshops, etc.)
 All the electrical equipment are installed and cabling/wiring between internal
equipment is carried out
 External cables (for connection to another module) are prepared:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Connection on one side of the module
• Cable left coiled inside the module
• Cables are uncoiled offshore and the other end is connected in the other
module
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6 2
ng
ni
Electrical works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Offshore works are called "hook‐up" and consist of:


py
Co

• Uncoiling of cables (small sizes)


• Connection of the 2nd cable end
• Installation of large cables (which cannot be left coiled) and connections:
− HV cables large cross sections
− LV cables to avoid junction boxes
• Re‐installation of equipment dismantled for transport purposes (turbine
exhaust, air inlet filter...)

 Cable penetrations into buildings are by MCT (Multi‐Cable‐Transit) which are


gastight sealings; this requires issue of detailed MCT drawings

 Segregation of rooms (like in a ship)


• Normal switchroom
• Essential switchroom (a60 fireproof)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Battery room (a60 fire proof)

 Compactness of rooms requires a careful design (space is limited!)


Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6 3
ng
ni
Electrical works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Metallic floors + false floor (technical void for cables)


py
Co

 Process/Utilities functional units constructed by package – Skids (turbo generators, air


instrument compressors, chlorination unit, glycol, etc.)
 During modules transportation from the yard to offshore (up to 2 months):
• Sea fastening of equipment
• Sea protection
• Temporary air conditioning
 Hook‐up drawings:
• To allow equipment/materials dismantled to be re‐erected offshore
• Cable schedules indicating: cable cut, cable left coiled...
 Hook‐up works :
Difficulties due to:
• Lack of space (many people working together at the same place)
• Low productivity (weather, lack of space)
• Communication between people sometimes difficult due to team internationalism
(English...)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Influence of weather conditions
• Logistics problems: mobilization / demobilization of people, accommodation, ships,
helicopters...

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6 4
ng
ni
Special offshore requirements

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Platform beaconing
py
Co

 The code MODU (international maritime organization) imposes requirements


regarding the navigational aids:
• Lanterns located at a corner platform to delimitate the «field»
• Flashing lantern : letter U morse code
• Lantern range = 10 nautic miles (19≈ km)
• Falshing of all the lanterns must be synchronized
• Battery autonomy = 96 h
• Automatic device to replace one burnt lamp immediately (6 lamps in
spare)
• Suitable for zone 1 or safe area
• Fog horn (2 nautic miles range) may be installed
• Bulky, heavy equipment
 Helideck beaconing

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Not mandatory except if night traffic is anticipated (often provided +
floodlight)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6 5
ng
ni
Special offshore requirements

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Telemetry tower beaconing


py

Red lamps all along the tower including the top (highest point)
Co

 Crane beaconing
Often fitted with 2 red lamps
 Flare
Difficult to achieve, due to limited behavior of lighting fittings to high temperature
 Emergency/vital lighting
• Escape ways to boat landings: luminaries with 11/2 ‐ 2 h battery autonomy
• Muster areas (close to life boats): floodlights supplied by batteries
 Living quarters
• 3 kW/people (without sea water desalination)
• Desalination unit 150 people = 300 kW!
• Rooms for 1 to 4 people, restaurant room, cold room, food storage, sports/leisure
rooms, etc.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Emergency shut down (electrical isolation)
• In case of gas penetration into the rooms, all the electrical sources are tripped,
including batteries (batteries C.B. enclosed in an Ex «d» box)
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6 6
ng
ni
Small power sources 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Wellhead platforms require small power sources (300 W to 3‐4 kW)


Co

• Windgenerator (complex) – One application at TOTAL: a 2.2 kW


machine for a continuous permanent consumption of 300 W over a
year!
• Solar array: 100 Wc gives 8 Wh over a year! 120 Wc requires 1m2
• TEG (thermo electric generator): power limited to 100‐200W (flame
system) expensive, one manufacturer in the world (gas fuel)
• CCVT: mini set (turbine + generator +boiler with special fluid) enclosed
into one hermetic cylinder with no maintenance for life except
cleaning of the burner – very reliable – limited to 4 kW (2 t). Only one
manufacturer in the world.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 6 7
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ON FPSO’S


BASIC RULES

J. Tastet – TECHNIP
P. Angays – TECHNIP
S. Marchais - TECHNIP
ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

Summary
rig
py
Co

Foreword
1. Introduction
2. Safety
3. Main equipment design
4. Space and weight
5. Modularization and Hook-up activities
6. Autonomous Power Plant
7. Marine environment
8. Conclusion

Slide 2 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

FOREWORD
rig
py
Co

FPSO : Construction Process of a FPSO

Slide 3 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
FPSO YARD
ht
rig
py
Co

Slide 4 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL BLOCK STAGE


rig
py
Co

Slide 5 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL PAINTING
rig
py
Co

Slide 6 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL KEEL LAYING


rig
py
Co

Slide 7 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

BOTTOM BLOCKS IN DRY DOCK


rig
py
Co

Slide 8 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

MAIN DECK READY FOR OUTFITTING


rig
py
Co

Slide 9 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

TRANSVERSE WATERTIGHT BULKHEAD


rig
py
Co

Slide 10 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

INSIDE TANK
rig
py
Co

Slide 11 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL GENERAL VIEW WEEK 19


rig
py
Co

Slide 12 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL GENERAL VIEW WEEK 20


rig
py
Co

Slide 13 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL GENERAL VIEW WEEK 21


rig
py
Co

Slide 14 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL GENERAL VIEW WEEK 23


rig
py
Co

Slide 15 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL GENERAL VIEW WEEK 28


rig
py
Co

Slide 16 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

LIVING QUARTER - LIFTING WEEK 29


rig
py
Co

Slide 17 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

LIVING QUARTER - LIFTING WEEK 29


rig
py
Co

Slide 18 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

LIVING QUARTER - LIFTING WEEK 29


rig
py
Co

Slide 19 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

LIVING QUARTER - LIFTING WEEK 29


rig
py
Co

Slide 20 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

LIVING QUARTER - LIFTING WEEK 29


rig
py
Co

Slide 21 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL LAUNCHING - WEEK 31


rig
py
Co

Slide 22 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HULL LAUNCHING - WEEK 31


rig
py
Co

Slide 23 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

HP COMPRESSOR MODULE
rig
py
Co

Slide 24 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

MODULE CONSTRUCTION – WEEK 45


rig
py
Co

Slide 25 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

MODULE CONSTRUCTION – WEEK 46


py
Co

Slide 26 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

MODULE INCOMING
py
Co

Slide 27 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

MODULE INSTALLATION
py
Co

Slide 28 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

MODULE INSTALLATION
py
Co

Slide 29 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

MODULE INSTALLATION
py
Co

Slide 30 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

MODULE INSTALLATION
py
Co

Slide 31 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

FPSO SAIL AWAY


py
Co

Slide 32 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

1. Introduction
rig
py
Co

FPSO : Floating Production Storage and Off-loading facilities

Power Plant
Living Quarters
Utilities

ce ss Units
Pro

Main substation

Slide 33 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

2. Safety
rig
py
Co

Slide 34 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

2. Safety
rig

SAFETY FIRST !!
py
Co

9 At least two separate substations preferably at opposite sides


9 Install the topsides (main) substation between process units and
utilities
9 Substations are generally installed in hazardous areas and shall
respect the IEC 90079-13 requirements
9 Gas detection within any substation should lead to de-energize
all electrical equipment which could produce any sparking
9 Safety systems should remain operational 100% of the time and
require specific autonomies for the battery back-up
9 Attention to be paid on environmental conditions for the
operating staff

Slide 35 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

3. Main equipment design


rig
py
Co

9 Mechanical equipment are more and more electrically driven leading


to high electrical demand
9 Main distribution voltage level to be limited to 12 or 15 kV insulation
class because of space / weight limitations
9 Main distribution switchboard (s) to match high current ratings
(nominal and short-circuit), which may exceed the available
technologies
Possibilities
9 Select the highest possible voltage (e.g. 13.2 kV instead of 11 kV)
9 Increase the generator impedances (but requires further checks)
9 Install VSDS for the main drivers (but additional panels / transformers)
9 Insert tie-breakers with current-limiting devices

Slide 36 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

4. Space and weight


rig
py
Co

9 Weight control and centre of gravity: main design criteria for a FPSO
9 The design shall include the towing constraints
9 Number of transformers to be reduced as far as possible
9 Access and maintenance conditions to be ensured for all equipment
9 Any possible transformer oil spillage to be recovered
9 Cable weight has a significant ratio in the overall “electrical” weight
9 Space for the main cable route should be booked from an early start of
the Project

Slide 37 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
5. Modularisation and
ht
rig

Hook-up activities
py
Co

9 Installation of the modules and


Hook-up: Important phases of
the FPSO construction
9 Two options could be
considered for the topsides:
central substation or additional
de-localized substations
incorporated in the modules

Slide 38 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

6. Autonomous Power Plant (s)


rig
py
Co

Basic criteria for the generation concept:


9 Safety services to be available 100% of the time
9 Normal production of the FPSO with a n+1 or n+2 sparing design
9 Preservation of the wells in case the main power generation is down
9 Black start of the main power plant
9 Cool-down and re-start of the main power plant after a shut-down

Slide 39 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

6. Autonomous Power Plant (s)


rig
py
Co

Basic criteria for the generation concept:


9 Safety services to be available 100% of the time
9 Normal production of the FPSO with a n+1 or n+2 sparing design
9 Preservation of the wells in case the main power generation is down
9 Black start of the main power plant
9 Cool-down and re-start of the main power plant after a shut-down

¾Emergency diesel generator in the living quarter


¾All safety services to be powered from this EDG
and backed up by batteries
¾Governed by class regulations and stamped by a
notified body

Slide 40 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

6. Autonomous Power Plant (s)


rig
py
Co

Basic criteria for the generation concept:


9 Safety services to be available 100% of the time
9 Normal production of the FPSO with a n+1 or n+2 sparing design
9 Preservation of the wells in case the main power generation is down
9 Black start of the main power plant
9 Cool-down and re-start of the main power plant after a shut-down

¾Generally through gas turbines


¾Steam turbines if justified by global Process criteria

Slide 41 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

6. Autonomous Power Plant (s)


rig
py
Co

Basic criteria for the generation concept:


9 Safety services to be available 100% of the time
9 Normal production of the FPSO with a n+1 or n+2 sparing design
9 Preservation of the wells in case the main power generation is down
9 Black start of the main power plant
9 Cool-down and re-start of the main power plant after a shut-down

¾Essential power Plant


¾Generally consisting of diesel driven generators
¾Such diesel generators may require high ratings

Slide 42 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

6. Autonomous Power Plant (s)


rig
py
Co

Essential power plant to be designed considering:


9 The magnetizing current of the transformers requiring to be energized
for black start / cool down / well preservation
9 The start-up of big motor (s) for the required services
9 Temporary paralleling with the main power plant
9 The short-circuit withstand of the main equipment

Slide 43 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

6. Autonomous Power Plant (s)


rig
py
Co

The power plant (s) are generally piloted by a centralized control system
(ENMCS) with the following basic features:

9Active and reactive power sharing between all main turbine


driven generators operating in droop mode
9Restore nominal frequency and voltage conditions after a load
change
9ENCMS to cover all possible network configurations (which may
require 2 independent control systems if bus ties are open)
9Load shedding in case one main generator is lost
9Specific operating conditions to be considered when main
generators and essential generators are paralleled.

Slide 44 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

7. Marine environment
rig
py
Co

Slide 45 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

7. Marine environment
rig
py
Co

9The electrical equipment shall be designed to withstand the


strong acceleration forces due to the impact of the waves
9Equipment in the hull and in the living quarters shall have a
marine certification. Recommendation is given to select the same
type of equipment between the topsides and the hull.
9Special attention to be paid on the heavy corrosion environment.
9Certification by a notified body for the installation covered by the
Marine standards (hull and living quarters covered by the Solas).

Slide 46 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

7. Conclusion
rig
py
Co

Slide 47 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

7. Conclusion
rig
py
Co

9The design of electrical installation in FPSO’s


requires the precise application of specific
requirements linked to the marine environment and
mainly to the associated safety constraints. Special
attention to be paid on the heavy corrosion
environment.
9New challenges appear due to the size increase of
the FPSO’s
9Alternate to the conventional gas turbine main
power plant could be the application of HVDC links
allowing to power the FPSO from an on-shore power
plant (if the FPSO is not too far from the shore)

Slide 48 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
PCIC Europe 2009

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

Thank you for your attention. Any Question ?


rig
py
Co

Slide 49 / J. Tastet / 27.05.2009


ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

12. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION WORKS

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8
ng
ni
Electrical works contract

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 INSTALLATION WORKS are carried out by a CONTRACTOR which


Co

can be:
• A company specialised in electrical works only (often the case for
onshore: refineries, petro‐chemical plants)
• A general contractor able to ensure all the discipline works (often
the case for offshore platforms). Part of the job may be
subcontracted to specialised contractors (sub‐contractors).

 If 2 different contractors are selected for electrical and


instrumentation works, the interfaces must be perfectly defined
in details. Coordination of works on site must be ensured by the
CLIENT (or his representative).
 If only one contractor is selected, interfaces and coordination are
easier for the client (it is the contractor’s job).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 The solution depends on contractor competence.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 2
ng
ni
Contractor scope of work

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Several types of contracts between the client (oil company) and


Co

the contractor can be placed (lump sum, schedule of rates...) but


in all the cases the following questions must be raised:

• What is the contractor scope?


• How works must be carried out?
• With which means?
• From when and how long?
• Within which budget?

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 3
ng
ni
Scope of work includes

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

a) Detailed engineering drawings (limits to be clearly defined)


Co

b) Supply of electrical materials and accessories (limit of supply?)


Main electrical equipment (switchboards, transfo, etc.) may be
supplied by the main contractor or by the electrical contractor in
case of a key turn contract.

 Note = Equipment with very long delivery (turbo generators,


large compressor motors often with VSD’s, etc.) or of a complex
type (ECS) are purchased by the Operator (LLI = Long Lead Items).

 A LLI handover to the selected contractor is made when placing


the contract with him. The contractor has to make an
endorsement (generally 3 months after the PO).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 4
ng
ni
Scope of work includes

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

c) Installation works (erection of all the electrical equipment –


Co

cable laying – connections – lighting – earthing – heat tracing)

d) Pre‐commissioning tests
Tests with de‐energised facilities (static tests)

e) Commissioning tests (optional – depends on contract)


Tests with all the facilities energised (dynamic tests)

f) As built drawings (updating after installation)

g) Contractor final dossier

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 5
ng
ni
Detailed engineering

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

The list of drawings to be issued by the contractor must be defined in the


Co

contract: which documents the contractor will receive from the client? (Level
of details)

 Typical list of documents to be issued by the contractor:


• Earthling drawings.
• Lighting drawings.
• Heat tracing drawings.
• Cable routing drawing (trenches and cable trays).
• Cable schedules.
• Connection & interconnection drawings.
• TYPICAL INSTALLATION DRAWINGS for POWER‐LIGHTING‐EARTHING (if
not defined / imposed by the client).
• Specification of bulk materials (lighting fittings, plugs & sockets, junction

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
boxes, remote control unit, connecting accessories, cable glands, labels,
etc.).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 6
ng
ni
Detailed engineering

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 TYPICAL LIST of documents to be given to the CONTRACTOR:


Co

• General plant lay out.


• Hazardous area classification drawings.
• Buildings lay out.
• Electrical consumers location.
• Piping racks drawings.
• Main cable routings drawings (issued at basic engineering).
• Main equipment specifications.
• Approved vendor list.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 7
ng
ni
Supply of electrical equipment and materials

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

A list of client supplied items (free issue) and contractor supplied


Co

items must be issued before the contract is awarded.


 Typical list
• Client supplied items
Generally long lead items (LLI) such as turbo generators, HV
switchboards, power distribution control system (PDCS) – large
motors with compressors – emergency diesel generator.
• Contractor supplied items
− What is the contractor scope?
− List of equipment and bulk materials to be supplied – Which
specifications?
− Limits of supply with other disciplines:
e.g. = Concrete supports for lighting columns by who?
Civil engineering or electrical contractor?

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Lifting / cranage of transformers by who?
− Sometimes a sketch is clearer than a long speech!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 8
ng
ni
Electrical installation works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Installation of transfo, HV, LV switchboards, DC‐AC/UPS, lighting/distribution


Co

panels (cranage by who?).


 Cabling
• Cable trays installation.
• Cable laying on cable trays or in trenches.
(trenches by the civil. Eng. Contractor in general).
(Cable laying requires at the same time a large mobilization of electricians
(non skilled or helpers).
• Connection of cables on equipment:
− HV connections by high skilled electricians.
− LV connections by “normally” qualified electricians.

 Lighting
• Fixing / installation of luminaries and plugs & sockets.
• Installation of secondary lighting panels – junction boxes.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Cabling and connections.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 9
ng
ni
Electrical installation works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Earthling
Co

• Earth loops buried into the ground.


• Connections of all metallic parts of electrical and non electrical equipment
to the earth via earthling cables.
 Telecom equipment
Installation, cabling and connections.
 Optional works
 Temporary lighting/heating or air conditioning of buildings during
construction.
 Temporary power supply of the site for all the other contractors facilities and
temporary offices.
 End of all works: mechanical completion.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Verification against drawings / specifications.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 10
ng
ni
Precommissioning tests

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Insulation resistance of cables (including motors).


Co

 Cable continuity checks.

 Insulation resistance of transfo, switchboards, etc.

 Earthling of all electrical equipment (visual) – earth loops


resistance measurements.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ready to be energized!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 11
ng
ni
Commissioning tests

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Generally excluded of contractor scope and carried out by the


Co

future operator/client.

• Direction of motor rotation.


• Operational/functional sequences (alarms‐trips‐automatisms...).
• Manufacturer (vendor) assistance for starting / energizing large
motors, turbo generator, diesel generator, HV switchboards...).
• Energization of all the ELEC equipment: transformers, motors, dc ‐
ac/ups, lighting...
• Test sheets to be fulfilled and signed by client.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ready for start‐up!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 12
ng
ni
As built drawings

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Generally a subject of discussion to get them!


Co

 Supply of as built is indispensable when the operator begins to


operate the plant (trouble shooting).

 Nb: drawings are now issued by a cad system, as built may be


issued under a CD ROM.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 13
ng
ni
Contractor final dossier

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Includes
Co

 All the as built drawings

 Operation / maintenance manuals obtained from equipment


manufacturers

 Spare parts list (generally for 2 years operation)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 14
ng
ni
Works progress

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Site installation
Co

• The contractor must define his needs (storage area, temporary


offices, power supply, water supply etc.)

 Contractor installation
• Personnel: corporate staff, temporary staff, local staff.
• Tools – consumables...

 Daily / weekly / monthly progress


• The «s» curve
• Ponderation method to be defined at the very beginning of works
(in 1/10 000 for example)
x
• A motor connection = 10.000 y

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• A lighting column installation = 10.000
z
• 1 meter of cable type installed = etc.
10.000

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 15
ng
ni
Works progress

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Coordination meetings on site


Co

Between contractor and client:


• Weekly basis
• Coordination with other disciplines
• Technical issues
• Manufacturer assistance = when?
• Delays due to contractor, due to client
• Limits of supply with others (normally already defined but...)
• Technical modifications:
• To be submitted for client approval if a change order is to be issued by the
contractor
 Appraisal of the quality of works
• By the client supervisors.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• By a third party inspection at the end of construction/beginning of
commissioning) – mandatory in France by the law (bureau VERITAS – DNV
– APAVE, etc.).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 16
ng
ni
Schedule of works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 When to start electrical works?


Co

• Neither too early, nor too late.


• Starting when piping is at 60% progress.
• Kick of meeting to be planned.

 Duration of works
• Detailed schedule of works to be submitted to client (bar chart) for
review – split by areas – key dates indicated (buildings available, ...)
• Liaison with general progress.
• Schedule to be updated frequently.
• Histograms (NB: of men per week) to be issued.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 17
ng
ni
Schedule of works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Delays
Co

• Due to client (supply of LLI items).


• Due to contractor (staff...).
• Due to another contractor (civil engineering, piping not ready...).
• Make a distinction between critical and non critical works.
• Solution: increase of staffing, mechanical means, extra hours, night
shift...).

 Act of god or extreme weather conditions


• Difficulties to dig trenches when the ground is frozen.
• No cable laying (uncoil) must be carried out below (‐5/‐10°C) risk of
cable sheath cracks.
• Public utility strike → no electricity!

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Extreme conditions: wind – snow – earthquake – flood…

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 18
ng
ni
Claims between contractor and client

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

A claim is often the result of a «failure» in the contract (technical or


Co

commercial) that one party will try to use for his benefit.
→ Generally the contractor tries to ask for a change‐order.
 Example
• The contractor has received DWG/SPEC with a revision number which is
different from the one in the bid documents.
• The contractor has received DWG which were not yet A.F.C. (approved for
construction).
• A contradiction has been found between 2 documents given by the client.
• Discussion for the actual progress (if terms of payment are linked to
progress) – the contractor has a trend to overestimate the progress!
• Additional works for which no prices have been included in the contract.
• Quality of materials not in accordance with the specification.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Be careful to the word «equivalent»!!!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 19
ng
ni
Claims between contractor and client

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Damages due to other contractors:


Co

• Earthling loops damaged by a civil engineering scrapper.


• Lighting columns damaged by trucks.
• Luminaries broken by piping people.
• Cables cut, damaged.
• Cable trays used as walking.
• Cable stolen!
• Fire due to welding.
• Etc.

Temporary warehousing (protection)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 20
ng
ni
Revamping works

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Modifications – Adjunctions – Removal of equipment.


Co

• Increased difficulties when plant is still in production.


• Requires a very detailed schedule (sometimes by elementary tasks).
• Survey by the contractor before a tender is submitted.
• Works sometimes in hazardous area (work permit: cold / hot).
• Works sometimes with equipment still energized (at LV):
precautions – procedures – special tools – high skilled electricians
(regulations in France).
• Frequent personnel standby for many reasons.
• Numerous hazards.

 The type of contract must incorporate all these aspects.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 21
ng
ni
Prefabrication 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Technical buildings may be prefabricated onshore at a


Co

contractor/manufacturer workshop (road gauge to be met) instead of


traditional civil engineering works.
 They may include:
• Electrical room
• Control room
• Battery room
• Auxiliary rooms (office, limited accommodation, HVAC room, air lock)
• Transformer bay (outdoor)
 This type of construction is more and more used, so as to limit works on site.
Better quality is obtained (fabrication in a workshop).
 Hostile environment requires this type of construction.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Process / utilities functional units constructed by package – skids.
E.g.: TURBO GENERATORS, AIR INSTRUMENT COMPRESSORS, CHLORINATION
UNIT, GLYCOL UNIT, etc.). As for offshore construction.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 22
ng
ni
Small power sources

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Solar array: 100Wc gives 8Wh over a year! 120Wc requires 1m².
Co

 TEG (thermo electric generator): power limited to 100‐200W


(flame system) expensive, one manufacturer in the world (gas
fuel).

 CCVT: mini set (turbine + generator + boiler with special fluid)


enclosed into one hermetic cylinder with no maintenance for life
except cleaning of the burner – very reliable – limited to 4 kW
(2t). Only one manufacturer in the world.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 8 23
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

13. ELECTRICAL SAFETY

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

DANGERS OF ELECTRICITY

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Type of Dangers

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 In regulations danger is defined as risk of injury.


Co

 The risks inherent with electric power can generally be divided


into two categories: direct and indirect.

 The direct danger is the damage that the power itself can do to
the human body, such as stoppage of breathing or disturbances
to regular heartbeats, or burns.

 The indirect dangers of electricity include the damages that can


result to the human body as a result of something caused by

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
electric shock, such as a fall, an explosion, or a fire.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Direct dangers

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Dangers of Electricity for human body include a variety of


Co

hazards:

• Electric shock

• Neurological damage

• Electric burn

• Electric arc flash

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Electric shock? Electrocution?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electricity at any voltage can be dangerous and should always be


Co

approached with caution.

 An electric shock can occur upon contact of a human or animal


body with any source of voltage high enough to cause sufficient
current flow through the muscles or nerves.

 The current may cause tissue damage or heart fibrillation if it is


sufficiently high.

 A fatal electric shock is referred to as electrocution.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Origin of danger

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

CURRENT or VOLTAGE?
Co

WHICH ONE IS THE MOST DANGEROUS?

Assistance for making a decision!

Think about birds sitting on high voltage
overhead lines (e.g. 220 000V)

Why they are not electrocuted???

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Shocked or not?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electricity requires a complete path (circuit) to continuously flow.


Co

This is why the shock received from static electricity (when


getting out of a car or walking across a man‐made carpet) is only
a momentary jolt: the flow of electrons is very brief when static
charges are equalized between two objects even if initial voltage
can reach 10 000 V, there is no dangerous effect on a person.

 Without two contact points on the body for current to enter and
exit, respectively, there is no hazard of shock.

 This is why birds can safely 
rest on high‐voltage power 
lines without getting shocked: 

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
they make contact with the 
circuit at only one point.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Shocked or not?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The presence of an
Co

intentional “grounding” point


in an electric circuit is
intended to ensure that at
least one side of it is safe to
come in contact with.

 Note that if the victim were


to touch the bottom side of
the resistor, nothing would
happen even though their
feet would still be contacting
ground.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Shocked or not?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Circuit with no ground!!


Co

 Despite the fact that the person's


feet are still contacting ground, any
single point in the circuit should be
safe to touch. Since there is no
complete path (circuit) formed
through the person's body from the
bottom side of the voltage source
to the top, there is no way for a
current to be established through
the person. However, this could all
change with an accidental ground,
such as a tree branch touching a
power line and providing

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
connection to earth ground.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Shocked or not?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Such an accidental connection


Co

between a power system conductor


and the earth (ground) is called a
ground fault. Ground faults may be
caused by many things, including
dirt build‐up on power line
insulators (creating a dirty‐water
path for current from the conductor
to the pole, and to the ground,
when it rains), ground water
infiltration in buried power line
conductors, and birds landing on
power lines, bridging the line to the
pole with their wings. Given the
many causes of ground faults, they
tend to be unpredictable.
 In the case of trees, no one can
guarantee which wire their

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
branches might touch.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Shocked or not?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

 If a tree were to brush up


against the top wire in the
circuit, it would make the top
wire safe to touch and the
bottom one dangerous – just
the opposite of the previous
scenario where the tree
contacts the bottom wire.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Shocked or not?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 With each person standing on the


Co

ground, contacting different points


in the circuit, a path for shock
current is made through one
person, through the earth, and
through the other person. Even
though each person thinks they're
safe in only touching a single point
in the circuit, their combined
actions create a deadly scenario. In
effect, one person acts as the
ground fault which makes it unsafe
for the other person. This is exactly
why ungrounded power systems
are dangerous: the voltage between
any point in the circuit and ground

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
(earth) is unpredictable.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Electrocuted Flying‐fox!

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Role of shoes!

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Why shoes are not protecting persons by preventing a circuit


Co

from forming?
Rubber‐soled shoes do indeed provide some electrical insulation
to help protect someone from conducting shock current through
their feet. However, most common shoe designs are not intended
to be electrically “safe”, their soles being too thin and not of the
right substance. Also, any moisture, dirt, or conductive salts from
body sweat on the surface of or permeated through the soles of
shoes will compromise what little insulating value the shoe had to
begin with.
 There are shoes specifically made for dangerous electrical work,
as well as thick rubber mats made to stand on while working on
live circuits, but these special pieces of gear must be in absolutely
clean, dry condition in order to be effective.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Normal footwear is not enough to guarantee protection against
electric shock from a power system.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Role of shoes!

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Hand or foot contact, insulated with rubber: 20 MΩ typical.


Co

 Foot contact through leather shoe sole (dry): 100 kΩ to 500 kΩ.

 Foot contact through leather shoe sole (wet): 5 kΩ to 20 Kω.

 Presence of water in a porous substance such as leather greatly


reduces electrical resistance.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Conductivity of earth

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Earth is not a very good conductor (at least not when it’s dry!). It
Co

is too poor of a conductor to support continuous current for


powering a load. However, as we will see in the next section, it
takes very little current to injure or kill a human being, so even
the poor conductivity of dirt is enough to provide a path for
deadly current when there is sufficient voltage available, as there
usually is in power systems.

 Some ground surfaces are better insulators than others. Asphalt,


for instance, being oil‐based, has a much greater resistance than
most forms of earth or rock. Concrete, on the other hand, tends
to have fairly low resistance due to its intrinsic water and
electrolyte (conductive chemical) content.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Summary

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electric shock can only occur when contact is made between two points of a
Co

circuit; when voltage is applied across a victim's body.

 Power circuits usually have a designated point that is “grounded/earthed”


firmly connected to metal rods or plates buried in the soil to ensure that one
side of the circuit is always at ground potential (zero voltage between that
point and earth ground).

 A ground fault is an accidental connection between a circuit conductor and the


earth (ground).

 Special, insulated shoes and mats are made to protect persons from shock via
ground conduction, but even these pieces of gear must be in clean, dry
condition to be effective. Normal footwear is not good enough to provide
protection from shock by insulating its wearer from the earth.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Though soil is a poor conductor, it can conduct enough current to injure or kill
a human being.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Risk  equation!

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 It is current which is dangerous and not directly voltage


Co

as people think (eg: birds on overhead lines!)

 Electric shock occurs upon contact of a (human) body with any


source of electricity that causes a sufficient current through the
body

 Current which passes through body is as per (Ohm’s law)


Uc Touch voltage
Ic 
R Body resistance
 Typically, the expression “electric shock” is used to denote an
unwanted exposure to electricity, hence the effects are

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
considered undesirable.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Direct danger

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Electric shock

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 When a shock is received, the electric current may take multiple


Co

paths through the body and its intensity is difficult or impossible


to predict.

 The passage of electric current may cause:


• muscular contractions
• respiratory failure
• fibrillation of the heart
• cardiac arrest
• injury from internal burns

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Any of these can be fatal!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Severity and effects of an electrical shock  

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Severity and effects of an electrical shock depends on:


Co

• Current magnitude (through the body)


• Human body impedance
• Length of time of the exposure
 Human body impedance is the sum (vectors) of the skin impedance at the
contact points (Zp1 & Zp2) + the internal body impedance Zi
• Zi is approximatively constant for an individual
• Skin impedance depends on:
− Skin temperature
− Skin thickness
− Skin area and pressure of the contact
− Type of clothes (dry, wet), shoes
− Touch voltage (high voltages trend to perforate thickness of skin)
− Skin humidity (perspiration)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− Current pathway in the body
− Morphology, etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Human body impedance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Human body resistance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Human body resistance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Human body resistance may vary from 100 000 ohm to 1000
Co

ohm!
 HV energy quickly breaks down skin reducing the human body’s
resistance to 500 ohm or less (internal body resistance Zi).
 The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) gives the
following values for the total body impedance of a hand to hand
circuit for dry skin, large contact areas, 50 Hz AC currents (the
columns contain the distribution of the impedance in the
population percentile; for example at 100 V 50% of the
population had an impedance of 1875Ω or less).
Voltage 5% 50% 95%
25 V 1,750 Ω 3,250 Ω 6,100 Ω

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
100 V 1,200 Ω 1,875 Ω 3,200 Ω
220 V 1,000 Ω 1,350 Ω 2,125 Ω
1000 V 700 Ω 1,050 Ω 1,500 Ω

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Maximum touch voltage

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Minimum considered values are as follows:


Co

• 2000 ohm in a dry location


• 1000 ohm in a wet/conductive location
• 500 ohm immersed
Statistics show that current below 25 mA has never led to death
 Pratically protection measures do not refer to current (which cannot be
measured) but to voltage applied to both parties of body which is called the
touch voltage
 So maximum touch voltages which can be applied to human body are:
• 2000 ohm x 0.025 A = 50V (Dry location)
• 1000 ohm x 0.025 A = 25V (Wet location)
• 500 ohm x 0.025 A = 12V (Immersed)
A voltage as low as 50 volts applied between two parts of the human body

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
can cause a current to flow that can block the electrical signals between
the brain and the muscles!!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Safety curves (duration vs voltage)  

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Safety curve lor AC
Protective device maximum tripping time (t) versus touch voltage Uc
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Zones time/current of effects of AC current on human body  

ai
Tr
P (IEC 60479)  
IF
ht
rig
py

 AC‐1 zone: Imperceptible


Co

A curve: Threshold of perception of current


 AC‐2 zone: Perceptible
B curve: Threshold of muscular reactions
 AC‐3 zone: Reversible effects: muscular
contraction
C1 curve: Threshold of 0% probability of
ventricular fibrillation
 AC‐4 zone: Possibility of irreversible effects
AC‐4‐1 zone: Up to 5% probability of heart
fibrillation
C2 curve: Threshold of 5% probability of
ventricular fibrillation
AC‐4‐2 zone: Up to 50% probability of heart
fibrillation
AC‐4‐3 zone: More than 50% probability of

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
heart fibrillation
C3 curve: Threshold of 50% probability of
ventricular fibrillation

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Current effects on human body

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

AC‐50/60Hz DC AC 10kHZ EFFECTS  COMMENTS


Co

0.04 mA Detection minimum level Detection with tongue

1 mA (man) 5 mA 12 mA Threshold of perception Mild sensation


0.7 mA (woman) 3.5 mA 8 mA

1 to 9 mA Painful shock; individual can let go at “let go range’’


will since muscular control is
maintained

10 mA ‐ 5 mn 65 mA 55 mA Victim cannot let go at will (control of Releasing grip may be


adjacent muscles lost)
100 mA ‐ 0.1 s difficult/impossible

25 mA ‐ 1 s 90 mA 95 mA Severe pain, difficulty breathing; Tetanus phenomena


muscular contraction
100 mA ‐ 0.2 s (respiratory paralysis)

75 mA ‐ 1 s Ventricular fibrillation Heart can no longer


500 mA ‐ 0; 1 s pump blood correctly

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
2000 mA Severe burns, cardiac arrest Tissue and organ burn
destruction of nervous centers

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Effects of High frequency currents 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Applications of HF currents 
Co

 Aeronautics  400Hz
 Electric welding  100 to 450Hz
 Electrotherapy  a few kHz
 Power supply (telecommunications)  20kHz to 1GHz
Skin impedance is inversely proportional  to frequency
At 500 Hz skin impedance is about 1/10 the one at 50 Hz
 For frequencies from 10 kHz to 100 kHz the threshold of

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
perception rises from 10 mA to 100 mA.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Effect of Direct Currents 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Threshold perception is about 2mA (instead of 0.5 mA with AC).


Co

 Ventricular fibrillation = 130 mA.

 The period the most dangerous is when contact is made or


removed.

 DC is most likely to cause a single convulsive contraction, which


often forces the victim away from the current's source.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Body organs affected by electric current 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Current through body is determined by body impedance and touch voltage


Co

 As far human body is concerned for electrical shock the following organs are
concerned
• Motor muscles controlled by the brain (muscles of members)
• Auto‐reflex muscles which operate automatically (rib cage, and heart)
 Motor muscles
• They ensure body movements.
• Brain does not any longer control muscles crossed by an electrical current,
which induces violent reactions (eg: the hand grasps the live conductor
without possible “let go”).
 Rib cage muscles
• Rib cage operates automatically under the control of brain (cerebellum)
which control numerous muscles involved in the breathing function.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Asphyxia can be due to electrical current action at the level of:
− Rib cage muscles inducing tetanus
− Cerebellum inducing breath arrest

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Body organs affected by current 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Cardiac muscle
py
Co

 Heart has its own automatic control system.


 During the cardiac cycle which lasts about 0.75 s, there is a critical phase
(called T) covering about 30% of the cycle. During this phase heart is
vulnerable.
 Heart muscle is basically excitable by an electrical current. If a current goes
through the heart at the end of the systole stage during sufficient time then
there are uncoordinated contractions of the cardiac muscle of the ventricles in
the heart.
 A fibrillating heart flutters rather than beats, and is ineffective at pumping
blood to vital organs in the body. The condition results in cardiogenic shock,
cessation of effective blood circulation, and cardiac death will occur very
quickly.
 It is necessary to perform artificial respiration to try to get the person
breathing again; or if the heart is not beating, cardio pulmonary resuscitation
(CPR) is necessary

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Ironically, medical personnel use a strong jolt of electric current applied across
the chest of a victim to “jump start” a fibrillating heart into a normal beating
pattern.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Cardiac cycle

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
First Aid 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Sometimes victims of electrical shock suffer cardiac arrest or heart stoppage as


Co

well as loss of breathing. Artificial ventilation alone is not enough in cases


where the heart has stopped. A technique known as CPR has been developed
to provide aid to a person who has stopped breathing and suffered a cardiac
arrest.

 For people working with electricity, the risk of electrical shock is higher than in
other occupations.

 You should, at the earliest opportunity, take a course to learn the latest
techniques used in CPR. The techniques are relatively easy to learn and are
taught in courses available through the Red Cross, Civil protection, firemen,
etc.

 Note: A heart that is in fibrillation cannot be restricted by closedchest cardiac

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
massage. A special device called a defibrillator is available in some medical
facilities and ambulance services.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Defibrillator

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 AC's alternating nature has a greater tendency to throw the


Co

heart's pacemaker neurons into a condition of fibrillation,


whereas DC tends to just make the heart stand still. Once the
shock current is halted, a “frozen” heart has a better chance of
regaining a normal beat pattern than a fibrillating heart.

 This is why “defibrillating” equipment used by emergency medics


works: the jolt of current supplied by the defibrillator unit is DC,
which halts fibrillation and gives the heart a chance to recover.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Summary of electric current effects 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electric current passing through body parts:


Co

• Skin………………………….Burns

• Motor muscles…………Releasing grip impossible

• Breathing muscles …..Respiratory paralysis

• Heart………………………Heart fibrillation

• Brain………………Destruction of nervous centers

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Indirect dangers 

ai
Tr
P Fires of electric origin
IF
ht
rig
py

Electric fires are due to:


Co

 Overheating of cables and electrical equipment due to


overloading of conductors.
 Leakage currents due to poor or inadequate insulation.
 Overheating of flammable materials placed too close to electrical
equipment which is otherwise operating normally.
 Ignition of flammable materials by arcing or sparking of electrical
equipment, including the scattering of hot particles from
electrical equipment. Welding activities are also prone to ignition.
 INJURIES associated with fire are usually burns but may include

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
smoke inhalation.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Indirect dangers

ai
Tr
P Explosions of electric origin
IF
ht
rig
py

Electrical explosions include


Co

 The violent and catastrophic rupture of any electrical equipment mainly


switchgear, more rarely motors, transformers,power cables,when they are
subjected to excessive currents. This release s violent electromagnetic forces
and dissipation of heat energy or if they suffer prolonged internal arcing
faults.
Note: This explains for example the reason why power cables are always firmly
secured with cable straps on cable tray routing (to avoid the whip effect which
can be very dangerous for people).
 Explosions whose source of ignition is electrical include ignition of flammable
vapours, gases, liquids, and dusts by electric sparks or the high surface
temperature of electrical equipment.
 A single low voltage torch battery can generate a spark powerful enough to
cause a fire or explosion in an explosive atmosphere!
Note: Static electricity can cause a fire or explosion where there is an explosive

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
atmosphere (such as in a paint spray booth).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Indirect dangers

ai
Tr
P Falls
IF
ht
rig
py

 People who receive an electric shock often get painful muscle


Co

spasms that can be strong enough to break bones or dislocate


joints. This loss of muscle control often means the person cannot
“let go” or escape the electric shock.

 The person may fall if they are working at height or be thrown


into nearby machinery and structures.

 Numerous falls due to electric shock are recorded.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Indirect dangers

ai
Tr
P Loss of power
IF
ht
rig
py

Loss of electrical power can result in extremely hazardous situations:


Co

 Flammable or toxic vapours may be released as a chemical


warms.

 Ventilation systems can no longer ensure its function jeopardizing


safety of personnel.

 Sudden absence of lighting.

 Many electric consumers require a permanent power supply (fire


and gas system, telecommunication system, etc.)

 An economic risk due to production loss (some process are

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
lengthy and costly to restart).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

ELECTRICAL  Faults

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

ELECTRICAL FAULTS
Co

• Risk of overcurrent
• Risk of fault current (insulation failure)
• Risk of overvoltage
• Risk of voltage drops and loss of power
• Risk of E.M. disturbances (EMC)
• Risk of degradation and ageing
• Risk of corrosion
• Risk of fire
• Risk of explosion

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Overcurrent

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 Overcurrent:
py

• Current exceeding the rated current carrying capacity of the conductor


Co

(cable but also machine winding, switchboard busbar, terminals, etc.)


• Consequences: excess heat can damage insulation with possible injury,
equipment damage / destruction, and fire.
Overcurrents are divided into 2 categories:
1. Overload: overcurrent confined to the normal path due to:
• excessive connected loads
• stalled motor
• overloaded motor (e.g. pump absorbing more power)

• Yet most conductors can carry a moderate overload for a short duration
without damage
• Transient moderate overloads are part of normal operation (motor
starting, transformer energization, etc.)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Overcurrent protection must be selected that will carry these currents. Yet
if the overload persists for too long the circuit must be tripped (circuit
breaker…)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Short circuit 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

2. Short circuit: any current not confined to the normal path (such a
Co

current bypass the normal load i.e. finds a “short” path around the
load)
• Short circuits are caused by:
− accidental contact
− worn insulation
ex: – 2 or more conductors accidently touching
− someone touching or dropping tools across energized conductors
− accidental connection between energized conductors and earth

 Overcurrent protective devices


• Fuses

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Circuit breakers

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Short circuit at terminals 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Fuse

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Fuse:
Co

• Intentional weak link in a circuit, thermally responsive device: the


fuse element will melt and open (fuse blown)
• Classified into:
− fast acting or time delay
− current limiting or not
• Fast acting = designed to respond quickly
• Time delay = designed to carry an overload during a pre‐determined
amount of time
• A fuse is designed to safely open the circuit only once
• Fuses are fail safe, Unlike mechanical devices nothing can happen
to a fuse that will prevent from opening or increase opening time

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Circuit breaker

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Circuit breaker:
Co

• Apparatus designed to sense abnormal overloads and short circuit currents and
open the circuit before catastrophic events occur
• Must be able to discern the difference between normal current variations (no
danger) and dangerous overloads and short circuits
• Not all the devices are designed to protect against both overloads and short
circuits; e.g. basic motor starter provides only only overload protection, some
circuit breakers provide only short circuit protection
 Technology:
• Utilizes a mechanical latching spring assisted switching and a thermal, thermal‐
magnetic, or electronic trip sensors that causes the switching mechanism to
unlatch and open the circuit.
• Common MCCB usually have thermal‐magnetic trip unit (including 2 sensing circuit
in series with a spring assisted latching switch)
• The first sensing circuit uses a thermal sensing element that reacts to overload
• The second sensing element is a magnetic coil that reacts to short circuit
• Either the thermal or the magnetic sensing circuit can cause the mechanically
latched switching circuit to open the circuit

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• This provides time‐current characteristics as required
• Unlike fuses Circuit breakers require annual maintenance

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Overcurrent protective devices must be selected carefully (interrupting rating/


Co

capacity = IR, and opening times)


 IR = hight rms (root mean square) AC at which the protective device has been
designed and tested
 Current limiting fuses have IR = 300 kA
 LV Moulded circuit breaker (MCCB) = 10kA
 RULE: The IR of the protective device must be always higher than the
maximum fault current of the electrical system (this value is calculated at the
design engineering stage, using the one line diagram and electrical equipment
data)
 If this condition is not met, then the protective device may be subject to an
explosion!
 It must be also remembered that if the electrical facilities grow (plant
expansion) short circuit currents increase leading to review the interrupting

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
capacity of all the overcurrent protective devices.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Reasons for electrical accidents?

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The most common cause of arc flash and other electrical accidents is
Co

carelessness!!

 Distractions, weariness, pressure to restore power or overconfidence can


cause an electrical worker to bypass safety procedures, work unprotected,
drop a tool or make contact between energized conductors

 Exposure to electric shock and arc flash can also be caused by:
• worn or broken conductor insulation
• exposed live parts
• loose wire connections
• improperly maintained disconnecting devices
• water or liquid near electrical equipment
• damaged tools and equipment

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• static electricity

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCKS

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against electric shock

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The fundamental rule of protection against electric shock is provided by the


Co

document IEC 61140 which covers both electrical installations and electrical
equipment.
 Hazardous‐live‐parts shall not be accessible and accessible conductive parts
shall not be hazardous.
 This requirement needs to apply under:
• normal conditions, and
• under a single fault condition
 Various measures are adopted to protect against this hazard, and include:
• Automatic disconnection of the power supply to the connected electrical
equipment
• Special arrangements such as:
− The use of class II insulation materials, or an equivalent level of insulation

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− Non‐conducting location, out of arm’s reach or interposition of barriers
− Equipotential bonding
− Electrical separation by means of isolating transformers

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Direct contact

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A direct contact refers to a person coming into contact with a


Co

conductor which is live in normal circumstances.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Direct contact with live conductors

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Indirect contact 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 An indirect contact refers to a person coming into contact with an


Co

exposed‐conductive‐part which is not normally alive, but has


become alive accidentally (due to insulation failure or some other
cause).

 The fault current raises the exposed‐conductive‐part to a voltage


liable to be hazardous.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Indirect contacts with exposed conductive parts made alive 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against direct contact ‐ 1

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1) Protection by the insulation of live parts


Co

 Inherent protection against direct contact by insulation of a 3‐


phase cable with outer sheat.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against direct contact ‐ 2

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

2) Protection by means of barriers or enclosures


Co

 This measure is in widespread use, since many components and


materials are installed in cabinets, assemblies, control panels and
distribution boards.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against direct contact ‐ 3

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

3) Protection by means of obstacles (screen, mesh) to prevent access


Co

to live conductors (e.g.: transformer bay).


4) By placing out of arm’s reach (reserved only to locations to which
skilled or instructed persons only have access) – minimum
distance must be 2,5 m more if metallic objects are handled
(ladders…). In principle, safety by placing simultaneously‐
accessible conductive parts out‐of‐reach, or by interposing
obstacles, requires also a non‐conducting floor, and so is not an
easily applied principle (dry location).
*Protection against overhead lines contact is ensured by a sufficient distance depending
on voltage line.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against direct contact ‐ 4

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

5) Use of Safety Extra‐Low Voltage SELV (50V‐25V‐12V)


Co

6) Limitation of the energy of discharge; used only in low‐power


circuits, and in particular circumstances.

e.g.: Electrotherapy tools, electric fences, etc.

7) Use of residual current operating device, (associated with a circuit


breaker or a switch) which operate at 30 mA or less, and is
referred to as RCDs of high sensitivity (for details see TT system)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Limits of protection against direct contact 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 All the preceding protective measures are preventive, but


Co

experience has shown that for various reasons they cannot be


regarded as being infallible. Among these reasons may be cited:
• Lack of proper maintenance
• Imprudence, carelessness
• Normal (or abnormal) wear and tear of insulation; for instance
flexure and abrasion of connecting leads
• Accidental contact
• Immersion in water, etc. A situation in which insulation is no longer
effective
• Many other aggressions may occur: excessive temperature due to
climate, poor ventilation of equipment, conductive dust, too many
cables in a duct, lightning overvoltages, etc.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against indirect contact

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Touching a normally dead part of an electrical equipment (eg:


Co

motor frame, transformer enclosure, etc.) which has become live


due to the failure of its insulation, is referred to as an indirect
contact.

 Exposed‐conductive‐parts of an electrical equipment are


separated from the live parts of the equipment by the “basic
insulation”. Failure of the basic insulation will result in the
exposed‐conductive‐parts being alive.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Measures of protection again indirect contact

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 1st level: Earthing of all exposed‐conductive‐parts of electrical


Co

equipment in the installation and the constitution of an


equipotential bonding network.

 2nd level: Automatic disconnection of the supply of the section of


the installation concerned, in such a way that the touch‐voltage /
time safety requirements are respected for any level of touch
voltage Uc. This automatic disconnection is related to the
earthing system of the installation.

 Touch voltage Uc is the voltage existing (as the result of insulation


failure) between an exposed‐conductive‐part and any conductive
element within reach which is at a different potential (generally
earth).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Touch voltage 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

 The greater the value of Uc, the greater the rapidity of supply
disconnection required to provide protection. The highest value
of Uc that can be tolerated indefinitely without danger to human
beings is 50 V AC. (dry location) or 25 V (wet location).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Earthing of exposed conductive parts 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Remember:
Co

• Touching an exposed conductive part made alive (motor


frame, …) is equivalent to a direct contact!!
• Current seeks the path of least resistance whether it’s a
conductor, the earth or a human body.
• This is why when an exposed conductive is earthed and
became alive, the fault current is split into 2 parts:
− one part through the human body (hundreds or thousands ohms)
− one part through the earthing conductor (a few ohms)

The current in each part being inversely proportional to the


resistance, to limit the current through the human body the
earthing resistance must be as low as possible.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Equipotential network

ai
Tr
P Equipotential network for an onshore installation
IF
ht

Diagram
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
The equipotential earth bonding system shall comprise internal loops and a general earth grid, connected at least in two 
opposite points. These two links shall have the same cross‐sectional area as that of the cable to which they are 
connected. The minimum equivalent cross‐sectional area of these links shall be 70 mm² Cu.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection by automatic disconnection 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 There are several ways of ensuring protection of persons by


Co

automatic disconnection.

 They are referred as (Power) System Earthing

 The International standard IEC 60364 has recognized 3 System


Earthings depending the way the neutral of the electrical system
is earthed:
• Neutral SOLIDLY EARTHED = TT
• Exposed conductive parts connected to neural = TN
• Isolated or impedance – earthed neutral = IT

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Designation principle

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Identification by 2 letters
Co

• First letter for transfo neutral connection


− T for connected to earth
− I for isolated from earth
• Second letter for frame connection
− T for directly connected to earth
− N for connected to the neutral at the origin of the installation itself
connected to earth

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
System Earthing aim fundamental  

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Inshort depending on the way the neutral point of the secondary


Co

of the HV/LV transformer (or generator) is connected to earth


(directly, by impedance, etc.) in case of an earth fault occurs (due
to an insulation failure), the disconnection of the faulty part is
carried in different manners requiring either an immediate
tripping or not. The associated equipment being different in each
case as well as the continuity of service offered.

 The aim is to limit, in all the cases, the voltage of the exposed
conductive parts to a value below dangerous the safety voltage.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
System Earthings

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The 3 System Earthings (TT‐TN‐IT) are identical as regards of


Co

protection of persons and property (indirect contact).

 But they are not identical as regards of dependability with respect


to maintenance & power availability.

 Each system earthing has its own advantages and drawbacks and
User must select the “best” System Earthing for his plant unless a
regulation imposes it.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
TT system

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

In this system all exposed 
conductive‐parts and 
extraneous‐conductive‐parts 
of the installation must be 
connected to a common 
earth electrode

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 The resistance of the earth electrode of substation neutral Rn is


py

10 Ω.
Co

 The resistance of the earth electrode of the installation RA is 20


Ω.
 The impedance of the earth‐fault loop is 10 + 20 = 30 ohms
 The earth‐fault loop current Id = 400/√3/10 + 20 = 7.7A.
 The fault voltage (touch voltage) Uf = Id x RA = 154 V and
therefore dangerous!
 The part of the installation affected by the fault must therefore
be automatically disconnected.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 As the fault current (7,7 A) is far lower than the settings of the
overcurrent protection device, the use of a residual current
operated device (RCD) is essential.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Residual current device (RCD) principle and operation 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A magnetic core encompasses all the current‐carrying


conductors of an electric circuit and the magnetic flux
Co

generated in the core will depend at every instant on the


arithmetical sum of the currents; the currents passing in
one direction being considered as positive (Ι1), while those
passing in the opposite direction will be negative (Ι2).
 In a normally healthy circuit Ι1 + Ι2 = 0 and there will be no
flux in the magnetic core, and zero e.m.f. in its coil.
 An earth‐fault current Ιd will pass through the core to the
fault, but will return to the source via the earth, or via
protective conductors in a TN‐earthed system.
 The current balance in the conductors passing through the
magnetic core therefore no longer exists, and the
difference gives rise to a magnetic flux in the core.
 The difference current is known as the “residual” current
and the principle is referred to as the “residual current”
principle.
 The resultant alternating flux in the core induces an e.m.f.
in its coil, so that a current I3 flows in the tripping‐device
operating coil. If the residual current exceeds the value
required to operate the tripping device either directly or via
an electronic relay, then the associated circuit‐breaker will
trip.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Residual current devices (RCD) are commonly incorporated
in or associated with moulded‐case circuit‐breakers (MCCB)
and air circuit‐breakers (ACB) and miniature circuit‐
breakers (MCB)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
GFCI

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
RCD sensitivity

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Protection is ensured by automatic disconnection of the supply


Co

using a RCD of sensitivity:


50
I Δn 
RA
where RA is the resistance of the earth electrode for the
installation

IΔn is the rated residual operating current of the RCD.

 The choice of sensitivity of the residual current device is a


function of the resistance RA of the earth electrode for the

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
installation, and is given in the following table.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Maximum resistance of the earth electrode 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

IΔn UL (50 V) (25 V)


Co

3A 16 Ω 8Ω
1A 50 Ω 25 Ω
500 mA 100 Ω 50 Ω
300 mA 166 Ω 83 Ω
30 mA 1666 Ω 833 Ω

 Upper limit of resistance for an installation earthing electrode


not to be exceeded, for given sensitivity levels of RCDs at UL
voltage limits of 50 V (dry location) and 25 V (wet location).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
RCD maximum disconnecting time 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Maximum disconnecting time for AC final circuits not exceeding 32A:


Co

Uo (1) (V) T (s)
50 < Uo ≤ 120 0.3
120 < Uo ≤ 230 0.2
230 < Uo ≤ 400 0.07
Uo > 400 0.04

(1) Uo is the nominal phase to earth voltage

For all other circuits, the maximum disconnecting time is fixed to 1s.
This limit enables discrimination between RCDs when installed on

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
distribution circuits.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Special cases 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 High sensitivity RCDs (≤ 30 mA) must be used for protection of


Co

socket outlets with rated current ≤ 20 A in all locations. The use of


such RCDs is also recommended in the following cases:
• Socket‐outlet circuits in wet locations at all current ratings
• Socket‐outlet circuits in temporary installations
• Circuits supplying laundry rooms and swimming pools
• Supply circuits to work‐sites, caravans, pleasure boats, and
travelling fairs

• In high fire risk locations RCD protection at the circuit‐breaker


controlling all supplies to the area at risk is necessary in some
locations, and mandatory in many countries.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• The sensitivity of the RCD must be ≤ 500 mA, but a 300 mA
sensitivity is recommended.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
TT summary 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 All exposed‐conductive‐parts and extraneous‐conductive‐parts of


Co

the installation must be connected to a common earth electrode.

 Neutral point of the transformer is directly earthed.

 Automatic disconnection of the faulty part is by RCD (at least 1 at


the main incomer, better 1 per feeder for continuity of service).

 No overvoltage during fault.

 Simple system to operate.

 Switchgear: 4 poles (3ph+N).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Cables (tri +N).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
TN system

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 All the exposed and extraneous‐conductive‐parts of the installation are


Co

connected directly to the earthed point of the power supply by protective


conductors.
 Calculations show that for 230/400 V networks the touch voltage is around
half the rated voltage of the network and therefore is dangerous.
 The fault current is high and automatic disconnection of the faulty circuit is
achieved by overcurrent protective devices (circuit breaker or fuses).
 If the protection is to be provided by a circuit‐breaker, it is sufficient to verify
that the fault current will always exceed the current‐setting level of the
instantaneous or short‐time delay tripping unit (Im).
 The instantaneous trip unit of a circuit‐breaker will eliminate a short‐circuit to
earth in less than 0.1 second.
 At the design stage, the maximum permitted lengths of cable downstream of a

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
protective circuit‐breaker (or set of fuses) must be calculated, while during the
installation work certain rules must be fully respected.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
TNC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1. PE conductor must be regularly connected to


Co

earth as much as possible.


2. The PE conductor must not pass through ferro‐
magnetic conduit, ducts, etc. or be mounted on
steel work, since inductive and/or proximity
effects can increase the effective impedance of
the conductor.
3. In the case of a PEN conductor (a neutral
conductor which is also used as a protective
conductor), connection must be made directly to
the earth terminal of an appliance before being
looped to the neutral terminal of the same
appliance.
4. Where the conductor ≤ 6 mm² for copper or 10
mm² for aluminium, or where a cable is movable,
the neutral and protective conductors should be
separated (i.e. a TN‐S system should be adopted
within the installation).
5. Earth faults may be cleared by overcurrent‐

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
protection devices, i.e. by fuses and circuit‐
breakers

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A PEN conductor must never be interrupted under any


Co

circumstances. Control and protective switchgear for the several


TN arrangements will be:

• 3‐pole when the circuit includes a PEN conductor,

• Preferably 4‐pole (3 phases + neutral) when the circuit includes a


neutral with a separate PE conductor.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
TN summary 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Fault currents, being limited only by the impedance of fault loop


Co

cables, are high (several thousands of amps)!

 Not suitable for locations with a fire risk.

 The insulation fault looks like a phase/neutral short circuit, hence


the disconnection of the faulty feeder is achieved by the classic
overcurrent protection devices (fuses or Circuit breakers) less
expensive than RCD’s associated with a circuit breaker.

 Most of CB’s shall be 3 poles (TNC).

 TNS require use of RCD!

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
IT system

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 In the event of a short‐circuit to earth fault, the system can continue to operate without
Co

interruption because the fault current is low. Such a fault is referred to as a “first fault”.
 In this system, all exposed conductive parts of an installation are connected via PE
conductors to an earth electrode at the installation, while the neutral point of the
supply transformer is:
• Either isolated from earth
• Or connected to earth through a high resistance (commonly 1,000 ohms or more)
 The current through an earth fault being low will not cause serious damage at the fault
position, or give rise to dangerous touch voltages, or present a fire hazard. The system
may therefore be allowed to operate normally until it is convenient to isolate the faulty
section for repair work.
 This enhances continuity of service.
 The second fault results in a short‐circuit through the earth and/or through PE bonding
conductors.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 In practice, the system earthing requires certain specific measures for its satisfactory
exploitation.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
IT system

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1 = Voltage limiter
Co

2 = neutral earthing resistance R


3 = permanent insulation monitor + audible / visual alarm
4 = 3 (or 4) poles circuit breakers
5 = fault location device (fixed/portable)
Magnitude of fault current = 400 / V3 / 1000 = 0.23A
Touch voltage (worst case) = 0.23 x 50 ohm = 11V! (this voltage is not dangerous
even in wet areas)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Manual fault location (at first fault)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Fixed automatic fault location 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Automatic monitoring logging and fault location 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
IT Automatic trip at second fault 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A second earth fault on an IT system (unless occurring on the


Co

same conductor as the first fault) constitutes a phase‐phase or


phase‐to‐neutral fault, and whether occurring on the same circuit
as the first fault, or on a different circuit, overcurrent protective
devices (fuses or circuit‐breakers) would normally operate an
automatic fault clearance.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Risk of fire

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Protection by a RCD of sensitivity ≤ 500 mA at the origin of the


Co

circuit supplying the fire‐risk locations is mandatory in some


countries.

 A preferred sensitivity of 300 mA may be adopted.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against indirect contacts without disconnection 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1) Use of class II equipment:


Co

 These appliances are also referred to as having “double


insulation” since in class II appliances a supplementary insulation
is added to the basic insulation.

 This arrangement avoids the need for any external metalwork of


the equipment to be connected to a protective conductor or to
earth.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Suitable for portable hand‐tools, domestic appliances, etc.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against indirect contacts without disconnection 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

2) Separated or isolated circuits


Co

 The two conductors from the unearthed single‐phase secondary winding of a separation
transformer are insulated from earth.
 If a direct contact is made with one conductor, a very small current only will flow into
the person making contact, through the earth and back to the other conductor, via the
inherent capacitance of that conductor with respect to earth. Since the conductor
capacitance to earth is very small, the current is generally below the level of perception.
 Transformers are specially designed for this duty, with a high degree of insulation
between primary and secondary windings, or with equivalent protection, such as an
earthed metal screen between the windings. Construction of the transformer is to class
II insulation standards.
Note = “isolated” in this context means separate from all the other systems and does not imply
“isolation”

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
Protection against indirect contacts without disconnection 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

3) Use of Protection extra low voltage (PELV)


Co

 The conception is similar to that of the SELV system, but the


secondary circuit is earthed at one point.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

14. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR 
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

TYPES OF PROTECTION

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ex
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 2
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Explosion protection methods
Co

1. General Principles

2. Regulations – Standards

3. Certification – Marking

4. Types of protection

5. Inspection, maintenance

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 3
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

General Principles

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 4
ng
ni
General principles

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Fire triangle
Co

 Explosion hexagon

 Sources of ignition

 Auto‐ignition temperature

 Temperature classification

 Gas/apparatus grouping

 Degree of protection

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 5
ng
ni
Fire triangle

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

FUEL
py
Co

SOURCE OF IGNITION
OXYGEN (21% in air)

 The Fire Triangle represents the 3 elements which must be present before
combustion can take place.

 The removal of one element is sufficient to prevent combustion.


 Techniques used in explosion‐protected equipment are based on the
suppression of 1 element of the fire triangle, or allow the 3 elements to co‐

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
exist but with specific requirements.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 6
ng
ni
Explosion hexagon

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Explosion is a very fast combustion which propagates.


Co

A pressure wave is generated due to hot gas expansion.


Ignition source

Confining Explosivity limits

Fuel Oxygen

Surroundings likely to propagate the 
explosion
 To avoid an explosion, one element of the hexagon must be

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
removed.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 7
ng
ni
Sources of ignition

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Electrical arcs / Sparks (switchgear opening, DC motor, short


Co

circuit…).

 Electrostatic discharges (pulley‐belt coupling…).

 Hot surfaces (motor frame, exhaust of combustion engines / gas


turbines).

 Naked flame (cigarettes, overhead line conductor…).

 Frictional sparks (grinding).

 Welding activities.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Lightning strike.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 8
ng
ni
Auto ignition temperature

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The auto ignition temperature is the minimum temperature at


Co

which a flammable material will spontaneously ignite.

 Careful selection of electrical equipment will ensure that the


surface temperature produced by the equipment, indicated by
the T‐rating, will not exceed the auto ignition temperature of the
flammable atmosphere which may be present around the
equipment. AUTO IGNITION
MATERIAL
TEMPERATURE (° C)
Methane 535
Propane 470
Butane 287
Ethylene 425
Hydrogen 560

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Acetylene 305
Hydrogen sulphide 260
Diesel oil 330
Petrol 460

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 9
ng
ni
Temperature classification (1/2)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The temperature class (T‐rating) is the maximum surface


Co

temperature that the electrical equipment may reach in the most


unfavourable conditions.

 Electrical equipment must be selected with due regard to the


auto ignition temperature of the flammable gas or vapour which
may be present in the hazardous location.

 The T‐rating of the electrical equipment shall be selected so as to


be lower than the auto ignition temperature of the flammable gas
or vapour surrounding the electrical equipment.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 10
ng
ni
Temperature classification (2/2)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

T-RATING TEMPERATURE (° C)
rig
py

T1 450
Co

T2 300
T3 200
T4 135
T5 100
T6 85

 T‐ratings are based on a maximum ambient temperature of 40° C.

 For example, apparatus classified T5, based on 40° C will have a


maximum permitted temperature rise of 60° C

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
(T5 = 100° C; ΔT = 100‐40 = 60 ° C).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 11
ng
ni
Gas/apparatus group (1/3)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Gases have been divided into 3 groups (IIA, IIB, IIC) as per the IEC/CENELEC
Co

standards.

 This classification is used to define the Maximum Experimental Saf Gap (MESG)
for the protection method referred as "d", and the Minimal Ignition Current
(MIC) for the protection method referred as "i".

 GROUP IIA: methane, ethane, propane, butane, pentane… decane propene


(propylene), styrene, benzene, toluene, turpentine, petroleum, dry cleaning
solvents, fuel oil, kerosene, gas oil, petrol for cars, methanol, phenol, acetone,
ammonia, chlorobenzen, H2S.

 GROUP IIB: ethylene, butadiene, cyclopropane, methyl ether…

 GROUP IIC: hydrogen, acetylene, carbon disulphide.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 GROUP I: corresponds to firedamp (coal mines).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 12
ng
ni
Gas/apparatus group (2/3)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Apparatus for the determination of M.E.S.G.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 13
ng
ni
Gas/apparatus group (3/3)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

GAS/APPARATUS
Co

MESG (mm) MIC (mA) MIE (mJ)


GROUP
GROUP IIA 0,30 100 180 Note : 10 mJ = discharge from a wall to wall carpet.
GROUP IIB 0,20 65 60 1 J = spark plug.
GROUP IIC 0,15 30 20 10 J = fatal electrical shock.
GROUP I 1,14 300

MESG : minimum experimental safe gap


MIC : minimum ignition current
MIE : minimum ignition energy

 Note:
• An apparatus marked IIA cannot be installed in IIB or IIC hazards.
• Apparatus marked IIB or IIC can be installed in IIA hazards.
• Apparatus other than flameproof "d" or intrinsic safety "i " has no sub‐
division letter (A, B, C) after the Group II mark; it can be used in all

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
hazards.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 14
ng
ni
Degree of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Enclosures of electrical equipment are classified according to their


Co

ability to resist the ingress of solid objects and water by means of


a system of numbers known as the international "Index
Protection" IP code IEC 60529. Also the IEC 62262 standard gives
the IK code (protection against mechanical impact).

Solid Objects Water


First Numeral Level of Protection Second Numeral Level of Protection

0 No protection 0 No protection
Protection against objects greater than Protection against drops of water falling
1 1
50 mm vertically
Protection against objects greater than Protection against drops of water when
2 2
12 mm tilted up to 15°
Protection against objects greater than Protection against sprayed water up to
3 3
2,5 mm 60°
Protection against objects greater than Protection against splashed water from
4 4
1,0 mm any direction

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Protection against jets of water from any
5 Dust-protected 5
direction
Protection against heavy seas - deck
6 Dust-tight 6
watertight
Protection against immersion in water
7
1m in depth and for a specified time
Protection against indefinite immersion in
8
water at a specified depth
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 15
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Regulations / Standards

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 16
ng
ni
Regulations / standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Safety problems related to the design and use of electrical apparatus in


Co

hazardous areas have led the Authorities, at a very early stage to impose very
strict rules.
 These rules are divided into 2 categories:
• Regulations  Published by the national legal Authorities.
 Application is mandatory.
 They vary from country to country.

• Standards  Published by a standardisation committee (international


or national or regional).
 Application is not mandatory but only if it has been
enforced by law.
 The standardisation committee generally includes
representatives from manufacturers, end users, safety
agencies, utilities, etc.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 They publish a document (the "STANDARD") which
represents a consensus between all the parties and reflects
the state of the art.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 17
ng
ni
Regulations – North America

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 USA:
Co

• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 497).


• National Electrical Code (NEC articles 500 and 505) issued by NFPA.
• API: RP 500 A / RP 500 B / RP 500 C / RP 14 J.
• AGA: American Gas Association.
• US Coast Guard.

 CANADA:
• 10 provincial inspection authorities + 3 city inspection departments
+ 2 territorial inspection authorities + 1 federal government
jurisdiction + jurisdictions for fixed offshore installations + Canadian

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Coast Guard.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 18
ng
ni
Regulations – Europe and other codes

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 EUROPE (European Union):


Co

• Two European directives called "ATEX" directives. They have


replaced the former national regulations of each European country
belonging to the European Union (25 countries in 2005).

 INTERNATIONAL MARINE ORGANISATION (IMO): has published


the MODU code (Mobile Offshore Drilling Units).

 REGULATIONS FOR CLASSIFICATION OF SHIPS:


• Bureau Veritas, Det Norske Veritas, Lloyd’s Register of Shipping,
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 19
ng
ni
Standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 There are 3 main categories of electrical standards through the


Co

world:
• International standards.
• European Union standards.
• American standards.
STANDARDIZATION BODIES
LEVEL NON ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL
International I.S.O. I.E.C
European CEN CENELEC
American ASTM ANSI API NFPA / NEC
ASME AGA IEEE
National :

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 France AFNOR UTE
 Germany DIN VDE
 U.K. BS BS
 Russia GOST

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 20
ng
ni
CENELEC standards (modes of protection)

ai
Tr
P
IF
Harmonised New CENELEC Equipment category
ht
Protection mode
standards Standards
rig

1 2 3
py

Flameproof enclosures “d” EN 50018 EN 60079-1 X X


Co

Increased safety “e” EN 50019 EN 60079-7 X X


Intrinsic safety “I” EN 50020 EN 60079-11 (pr)
Safety mode “ia” X X X
Safety mode “ib” X X
Encapsulation “m” EN 50028 EN 60079-18 X X
Oil immersion “o” EN 50015 X X
Pressurised apparatus “p” EN 50016 EN 60079-2 X X
Powder filling “q” EN 50017 X X
Type of protection “n” EN 50021 EN 60079-15 X
General EN 50014 EN 60079-0 Common rules

 Note:
• The new CENELEC standard series (EN 60079) has the same numbering as
the corresponding IEC 60079 standard series.
• IEC and CENELEC standards EN 60079 are either identical or with a few

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
differences.
• The CENELEC standard series EN 50014 is going to be progressively
repealed.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 21
ng
ni
Other IEC‐CENELEC standards

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 IEC/EN 60079‐10: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas


Co

atmospheres (Classification of hazardous areas)

 IEC/EN 60079‐14: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas


atmospheres (Electrical installations design, selection and
erection)

 IEC/EN 60079‐17: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas


atmospheres (Electrical installations inspection and maintenance)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 IEC/EN 60079‐19: Electrical apparatus for explosive gas
atmospheres (Equipment repair, overhaul and reclamation)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 22
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Certification – Marking

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 23
ng
ni
Certification – Marking 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CERTIFICATION:
Co

• The term "CERTIFICATION" means that an apparatus has been examined


by a testing authority (a third party, who is not the manufacturer or the
user) and, where necessary tested and found to comply with the
requirements of a standard specification for the appropriate protection
concept.
• Most industrialized countries have their own certification system but,
when they do not, they normally recognize the certification of country of
origin of the equipment.
 EUROPEAN CERTIFICATION:
• All the recognized certifying laboratories in the Union are now recognized
in all member countries. Equipment for hazardous locations must be
certified to the CENELEC Standards.
• Acceptance of the certification of these laboratories is required by law in
all member countries and manufacturers can choose a laboratory in any of
the member countries if they are not satisfied with the laboratories in

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
their own country.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 24
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 EUROPEAN CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE:


Co

After tests have been successfully carried out, the Certifying Authority can
deliver two types of certificates of compliance:
• Certificate of Conformity:
This certificate is issued when the apparatus is strictly in accordance with
the CENELEC standards EN 50014 to EN 50021, EN 50028 and EN 50039
(which recognize only seven types of protection).
The certificate of conformity is valid for all the CENELEC countries.
• Inspection Certificate (sometimes called certificate of control):
This certificate is issued for apparatus not strictly in accordance with the
CENELEC standards but which provide at least the same degree of safety.
The inspection certificate can be national or European.
− National Certificate: only valid in the country where the inspection / tests by
the Certifying Authority have been carried out.
− European Certificate: delivered after the approval of all the European
Certifying Authorities.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Note: due to the complexity and lengthy procedures to get an European
inspection certificate, to day only 3 or 4 certificates have been delivered!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 25
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 AMERICAN CERTIFICATION:
Co

• USA:
− UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC.
− FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION
− CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
− ETL TESTING LABORATORIES INCORPORATED
− MET LABORATORIES
− UNITED STATES TESTING CO. INC.

• CANADA:
− CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION
− ETL TESTING LABORATORIES INC. (USA)
− UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES OF CANADA

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (USA)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 26
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 MANUFACTURER’S RESPONSIBILITY:
Co

• By marking the electrical apparatus in accordance with the standards the


manufacturer attests on his own responsibility that the routine
verifications and tests have been successfully completed and that the
product complies with the specification submitted to the national or other
appropriate certifying authority.
 IEC/CENELEC marking:
• the name of the manufacturer or his registered trade mark,
• manufacturer's type identification,
• the symbol:
− Ex: which indicates that the electrical apparatus has been constructed and
tested for use in an explosive gas atmosphere in accordance with IEC
standards.
− EEx: which indicates that the electrical apparatus has been constructed and
tested for use in an explosive gas atmosphere in accordance with CENELEC
standards.
NOTE: Recently the single symbol Ex has been adopted by the CELECEC
standards, leading to use only the symbol Ex for both IEC and CENELEC.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
N.B.: The symbol ATEX is used only in FRANCE for electrical apparatus not manufactured in
accordance with CENELEC standards but which offers an equivalent level of safety.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 27
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

The sign for each type of protection used: (IEC/CENELEC)


Co

o oil‐immersed apparatus
p pressurized enclosures
q powder‐filled apparatus
d flameproof enclosures
e increased safety
ia intrinsic safety category a
ib intrinsic safety category b
m encapsulation
n type of protection "n"
S special protection (IEC only)
 The symbol of the group of the electrical apparatus:
• I for electrical apparatus for mines susceptible to fire‐damp.
• II or IIA or IIB or IIC for electrical apparatus for use in explosive gas

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
atmospheres in surface industries (for "d" and "e" type).
 The temperature class (T1 to T6).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 28
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
Equipment marking
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 29
ng
ni
European union "explosion‐protected" mark

ai
Tr
P (for European Union (EU) members only)
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 30
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Certificate number
Co

 Note:
• The sign X after the certificate
reference indicates that special
conditions for safe use must be
followed.

• The sign U after the certificate


reference indicates that it is a
component which cannot be
used alone.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 31
ng
ni
Certification – Marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 American marking:
Co

• Class I: gases and vapours


• Class II: dusts
• Class III: flying (textile fibbers and sawdust)
• Division 1: location where the hazard is expected to be present in the
normal operation of the plant.
• Division 2: location where the hazard exists only in the event of failure in
the processing equipment of plant.
• Group of ignition:
− Group A: reference gas: acetylene
− Group B: reference gas: hydrogen
− Group C: reference gas: ethylene
− Group D: reference gas: propane
− Group E: reference gas: metallic dusts such as aluminium
− Group F: reference gas: carbonaceous dusts

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− Group G: reference gas: flour, grain, plastic dusts
• Group of temperature: T1 to T6 (similar to CENELEC).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 32
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Types of protection

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 33
ng
ni
Types of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 There are 7 different methods of explosion protection:


Co

BASIC TECHNIQUE METHOD CODE


Isolation between explosive Oil immersion "o"
atmosphere and electrical device Pressurisation "p"
(removal of fuel source).
Encapsulation "m"
Sparks suppression energy limitation Increased safety "e"
(removal of ignition source). Intrinsic safety "i"
Powder filling "q"
Confining the explosion.
Flameproof enclosure "d"

 There is also a method of explosion protection, applicable only


for Zone 2 using various principles and techniques: type "n".

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 34
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

DEFINITION:
Co

 A type of protection in which the parts which can ignite an


explosive atmosphere are placed in an enclosure which can
withstand the pressure developed during an internal explosion of
an explosive mixture and which prevents the transmission of the
explosion to the explosive atmosphere surrounding the enclosure
(EN 60079).
• Zone of use: 1 & 2.
• Ambient conditions: ‐20°C to +40°C.
• Code letter "d" (from the German "druckfeste" ≈ pressure tight).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 35
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION:
Co

 Flameproof enclosure is not gas tight and a gas or vapour will


enter the enclosure (including components which are an ignition
source) where for example joints or cable entries exist.

 An explosion may occur, but the enclosure is strong enough to


contain the explosion pressure and the gaps at the joints and
thread of cable entries must be long and narrow to cool the
flames / hot gases so as to prevent ignition of a flammable
atmosphere which may exist outwith the enclosure.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 36
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 37
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

MAIN FEATURES:
Co

 Materials: cast iron, aluminium alloys, phosphor


bronze, stainless steel (plastic materials limited to
free internal volume ≤ 10 cm3).

 Waterproof ensured by gaskets or rubber "o" rings


(must be an integral part of the original design).
Joints must be greased, but not painted.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 38
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Gland thread: ensure at least 5 threads are engaged.


Co

 Make sure that all covers, fittings are secured and all bolts in
place.

 Holes (unused cable/conduit entries) must be blanked, using


appropriate certified metal stoppers with 5 full threads engaged
(plastic stoppers are unacceptable).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 39
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Spare parts used must be strictly identical to


Co

original ones.
(a)

 When cable conduits are used, ensure that an


adequate seal is provided (suitable stopper
box) to prevent transmission of flammable (b)
material.

 Flamepath joints:
• Flanged joint, e.g.: covers of junction boxes (a) (c)

• Spigot joint, e.g.: motor endshields (b)


• Threaded joint, e.g.: cable glands, conduit

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
entries (c)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 40
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Direct / indirect entry:


Co

Direct entry Indirect entry

 Direct entry: 1 single flameproof chamber incorporating arcing components.


 Indirect entry: 2 separate chambers:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• 1 chamber containing only terminals
• 1 chamber incorporating arcing components; connection is made via
bushings

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 41
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Obstruction of flamepath: a solid obstruction such as a wall,


Co

steelwork, conduit, etc. in close proximity to the opening at the


joint can, in the event of an internal explosion, reduce the
efficiency of the flamepath to the extent that ignition of the
external gas would occur.
GROUP DISTANCE
IIA 10 mm
IIB 30 mm
IIC 40 mm

Minimum distances d (IEC60079-14).

 Flameproof enclosure are tested for 1.5 time the explosive


pressure (they are not able to withstand the energy which may be

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
released as a result of an internal short‐circuit).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 42
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Modification of flameproof enclosures:


Co

• Flameproof enclosures are normally supplied complete with all


internal components and certified by a recognised Testing Authority
which has taken into consideration:
− Free internal volume (after all components have been fitted).
− Temperature rise (determined by the maximum power dissipation).
− Creepage and clearance distances.
− Rise in pressure (as a result of an internal explosion using a gas/air
mixture).
• This certification "seals" the design of the apparatus so that any
unauthorised modifications will invalidate the certification.
• Replacement components should always be exactly the same as the
original specified components.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 43
ng
ni
Flameproof "d"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Removal of components to be avoided: free internal volume


Co

increases!
• Adding components is also forbidden: increased explosion pressure
due to pressure piling.
• Drilling and taping of cable gland/conduit entries: to be carried out
only by the manufacturer of the enclosure or his approved agent.
• Correct alignment of the threaded entry is important.
• Number and size of cable entries must not exceed the number
permitted in the original design which has been certified, so as not
to impair the strength of the flameproof enclosure.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 44
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• The definition for Electrical apparatus with type of protection "n" as


given in the IEC Standard 60079‐15 states:
"A type of protection applied to electrical apparatus such that, in
normal operation, and in certain specified abnormal, it is not
capable of igniting a surrounding explosive atmosphere and a fault
capable of causing ignition is not likely to occur".

 ZONE OF USE: Zone 2

 ORIGIN is from UK, with the symbol "N" (use in the UK only).
Then the European Standards Organisation (CENELEC) recognised
this type of protection using the symbol "n".

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 45
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 PRINCIPLE:
Co

• Similar to increased safety type "e" apparatus except that there is a


relaxation in the constructional requirements, since the presence of
a flammable gas or vapour is less likely in Zone 2.

 MAIN FEATURES:
• Enclosures and motor fan guards, where exposed to high risk of
mechanical damage, to have resistance to impact of 3.5J.
• Minimum ingress protection IP54 where an enclosure has exposed
live parts internally.
• Use of certified terminals.
• Terminals manufactured form high quality insulation material.
• Specified creepage and clearance distances incorporated into the
design of the terminals.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Terminal locking devices to ensure conductors remain secure in
service.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 46
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 SUB‐DIVISION OF TYPE "n" APPARATUS:


Co

CENELEC/IEC
Type ‘n’ apparatus variations
marking

Restricted breathing enclosures R

Energy limited apparatus L

Simplified pressurised enclosure P

Contacts of sparking apparatus protected by


C
methods other than R, L or P

Non-sparking apparatus A

 The above table shows the marking on Type "n" apparatus to


indicate the method applied to either eliminate or control spark

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
energy and/or hot surfaces.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 47
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Non sparking device "nA": device constructed to minimize the risk


Co

of occurrence of arcs or sparks capable of creating an ignition


hazard during conditions of normal operation.
 Main features for non‐sparking electrical machines:
• IP54 minimum
• Minimum radial air gap

 Device and components "nC": this type of protection includes:


• Encapsulated devices: Device, which may or may not contain voids,
which is so constructed that it is totally immersed in an
encapsulating compound so that it is sealed to prevent entry of an
external atmosphere.
• The device in this instance will be totally sealed by an encapsulating

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
material, typically "epoxy resin", to prevent entry of a flammable
gas or vapour.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 48
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Enclosed break devices: Device incorporating electrical contacts that


Co

are made and broken and that will withstand an internal explosion
of the flammable gas or vapour which may enter it without
suffering damage and without communicating the internal
explosion to the external flammable gas or vapour.
This technique is used in, for example, the lamp holders of type "n"
apparatus. The example below shows a typical lamp holder in
which there are two sets of contacts. One set of contacts is
enclosed in what is effectively a flameproof enclosure in which the
free internal volume must not exceed 20 cm3. This enclosure is
designed to withstand an internal explosion and the voltage and
current limitations are 600 V and 15 A respectively.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 49
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Hermetically‐sealed devices: device which is so constructed that the


Co

external atmosphere cannot gain access to the interior and in which


the seal is made by fusion, for example by soldering, brazing,
welding or the fusion of glass to metal.
A device which prevents an external gas or vapour gaining access to
the interior by sealing of joints by fusion, e.g. welding, soldering,
brazing, or the fusion of glass to metal. The example of hermetic
sealing shown below is a reed switch which comprises a set of
contacts hermetically sealed within a glass envelope.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 50
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Non‐incendive components: components having contacts for


Co

making or breaking a specified ignition capable circuit but in which


the contacting mechanism is constructed so that the component is
not capable of causing ignition of the specified explosive gas
atmosphere.

• Sealed devices: device which is so constructed that it cannot be


opened during normal service and is sealed effectively to prevent
entry of an external atmosphere.
A device containing normally sparking components or hot surfaces
constructed in such a way that opening is prevented in normal
operation and in which the sealing effectively prevents access by a
flammable gas or vapour. The free internal volume must be less
than 100 m3. A device containing normally sparking components or
hot surfaces constructed in such a way that opening is prevented in
normal operation and in which the sealing effectively prevents

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
access by a flammable gas or vapour. The free internal volume must
be less than 100 m3.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 51
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Restricted breathing "nR":


Co

• Used mainly for lighting fittings


• Very good sealing at all joints and cable entries.

 Energy limited "nL":


• Voltages and currents are maintained at safe levels using Zener
Diodes and series resistors.
• Similar to IS protection.
• Circuits contain normally sparking contacts.
• Installation conditions (manufacturer documentation) to be met
(maximum values of voltage, current, inductance, capacitance

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
including external cable values).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 52
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 MOTOR WITH TYPE "n" PROTECTION


Co

 ASSESSMENT FOR POSSIBLE AIR GAP SPARKING (motor > 100


kW):
(not applicable to motors with a duty S1 or S2, continuously
running with an average starting frequency in normal operation
not exceeding 1 start per week).
• Assessment to be made in accordance with the IEC 60079‐15
standard.
Table 6 indicates the "rotor cage ignition risk" for air gap sparking.
If risk factor > 5, the rotor cage shall be subject to an ageing process
(at least 5 locked rotor tests), then to 10 D.O.L. starts (unaccoupled)
with the motor immersed in an explosive gas mixture. No explosion
must occur.
Or special measures (pre‐start ventilation or fixed gas detection

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
inside the motor enclosure or special agreement between
manufacturer and end‐user) may be applied.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 53
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 OPERATION WITH A FREQUENCY CONVERTER


Co

(or a non‐sinusoidal supply):

Two methods can be used to prove that the thermal limits are not
exceeded and functional performance is demonstrated:

• Method n° 1 (type test): combined test of frequency converter +


motor (using the detection / measurement used for protection in
normal operation).

• Method n° 2 (by calculation).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 54
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MACHINES > 1 kV


Co

• "n" type protection assumes that occurrence of a flammable gas


atmosphere and a motor start sequence do not occur
simultaneously.

• Some degree of surface discharge activity can occur on HV windings


without affecting the performance of the machine. Ignition is most
probable from short term discharges, especially those associated
with motor starting.
The table 7 of the IEC 60079‐15 standard gives the ignition risk
factor for potential stator winding discharge.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 55
ng
ni
Type "n" Protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• If risk factor > 6, use of anti‐condensation space leaters and


Co

• Either tests of "no explosion"


− Motor (stator) filled with gas explosive atmosphere.
− Application of 1.5 Un during 3 mn (steady state ignition test).
− Impulse test 10 times of 3 peak phase voltage (impulse ignition test)
with a time to half value between 20 to 30 µs.
− Rotor cage ageing process: 5 locked rotor tests.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 56
ng
ni
Increased safety "e"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• A protection method in which increased measures are taken to


prevent the possibility of excessive HEAT, ARCS, SPARKS occurring
on internal or external parts of the apparatus in normal operation.

 ZONE OF USE:
• Zone 1 – Zone 2

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 57
ng
ni
Increased safety "e"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 MAIN FEATURES:
Co

• For equipment with U < 11 kV.


• Mechanically strong enclosure resistant to impact – tested to 4 or 7 joules
impact energy depending on application.
• Degree of protection against solid objects and water – at least IP 54.
• Terminals manufactured from high quality insulation material.
• Specified creepage and clearances incorporated in design of terminals.
• Terminal locking devices to ensure conductors remain secure in service.
• Certified de‐rating of terminals (nearly half of that for standard
application).
• Limitation of the number of terminals installed in a given size of enclosure.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 58
ng
ni
Increased safety "e" motors

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Motor similar in appearance to standard industrial motor.


Co

 Inspection of the certification / rating plate is usually necessary to identify it.


 Motor not designed to withstand to an internal explosion!
 Includes special design features to prevent arcs, sparks and excessive surface
temperature.
 MAIN FEATURES:
• Special attention to airgap concentricity and clearance of all rotating parts.
• Impact testing of motor frame.
• Temperature rise 10 °C lower than normal.
• T2 or T3 surface temperature limitation.
• Compliance with tE characteristic.
• Special terminal block with specific creepage/clearance distances and locking
devices on terminals.
• Minimum ingress protection to IP54.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Under stall (locked rotor) conditions, the rotor surface temperature will normally
increase faster than that of the stator windings, and hence, the T rating applies to both
internal and external surface temperatures.
Under fault conditions, the motor must trip within the tE time specified on the motor
data plate.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 59
ng
ni
Increased safety "e" motors

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

 TE TIME:
• The time taken to reach the limiting temperature from the temperature
reached in normal service when carrying the starting current IA at
maximum ambient temperature.
• During fault conditions, the thermal overload device in the motor starter
must trip out the motor within the tE time.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• The tE time and the ratio IS / IN (I starting / I rated current) are marked on
the motor and are influential in the selection in the thermal overload.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 60
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• Protection against gas ingress (external atmosphere) into an


enclosure is ensured by maintaining a protective gas inside the
enclosure at a pressure above that of the external atmosphere.

 ZONE OF USE:
• Zone 1, Zone 2.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 61
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 MAIN FEATURES:
Co

• Minimum safe gas overpressure: 0,5 mBar (50 Pa).


• Protective gas: clean air, sometimes nitrogen.
• Protective gas must be free of moisture, oil, dust, chemicals (air
instrument quality).
• IP4X minimum.
• Enclosure and associated ducts must be designed to withstand 1,5
time the working over pressure declared by the manufacturer, and
also the overpressure obtained when all outlets are closed
(minimum overpressure: 2 mBar).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 62
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 PURGING:
Co

• Before electrical apparatus inside the enclosure is energised, a


purge cycle must be carried out, so as to clean the atmosphere
inside the enclosure.
• A specified quantity of safe gas must pass through the enclosure
during a specified time (to remove any flammable gas).
• Standards require a minimum quantity of safe gas equivalent to 5
times the internal volume of the enclosure (often a greater number
of air changes is applied).
• Purge duration is controlled by a timer in association with a flow‐
rate sensor.
• Purging must occur automatically and must prevent equipment
energisation before the complete purging has been carried out.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Protective gas is provided by either a motor driven fan, a
compressor, or from storage cylinders.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 63
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CONTROL CIRCUIT / SAFETY DEVICES:


Co

• (1) Overpressure sensor or switch (located at a point the most


difficult to maintain the overpressure).
• (2) Protective gas flow‐rate monitoring device.
• (3) Pressure gauge recommended.
• (4) Pressure relief valve (set at 75 % of maximum declared safe
overpressure).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 64
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DUCTS:
Co

• The entry of the duct must be located in a non hazardous area.


• Exhaust duct outlet must be located in a non hazardous area, but
may be located in hazardous area if a spark / particle arrestor is
fitted.

 PRESSURISATION:
There are 4 types of pressurisation systems:
• Static: rely on very good seals (no leakage).
• Pressurisation with continuous flow: a continuous flow of safe gas
ensures maintaining of overpressure and also cooling of hot parts
within the enclosure.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 65
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Pressurisation with leakage compensation: used when enclosures


Co

are poorly sealed at their joints.


The system is purged with damper at the exhaust duct open, on
completion, the damper is closed and the flow of protective gas
reduced to a level sufficient to compensate for leakages at seals /
joints.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 66
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Continuous dilution
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 67
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ACTION ON LOSS OF PRESSURE:


Co

• No internal source of release: loss of overpressure of flow rate will


activate either an alarm or shutdown depending on zone and type
of apparatus within the enclosure.
Enclosure contains Enclosure contains apparatu
Area classification ignition-capable apparatus which does not produce a
source of ignition in normal
operation
Zone 1 Alarm and switch off Alarm
Internal pressurisation not
Zone 2 Alarm
required

(according to EN 60079‐14)

• With internal source of release: out of electrical scope.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 68
ng
ni
Pressurisation "p"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 EXTERNALLY MOUNTED ELECTRICAL APPARATUS:


Co

• All the devices installed on the exterior of a pressurised enclosure must be


explosion protected (pressure/flow rate sensors, switches, JB’s, etc).
 APPARATUS ENERGISED DURING ABSENCE OF OVERPRESSURE:
• The heater which shall be energised when the machine is without
overpressure, shall be explosion protected (Ex "d" or Ex "e").
• Emergency lighting installed inside a pressurised control room must be
explosion protected (Ex "e" for example), solenoid for fire dampers must
be Ex "d", as well as switches, flow rate sensors may be Ex "i", etc, Ex "d"
enclosures shall be used for control panels.
 APPLICATIONS:
• Transformer / rectifier cabinets.
• Control consoles.
• VDU’s.
• Gas analysis equipment.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Control rooms – switchrooms – workshops.
• Machines (large units being lighter than a flameproof machine).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 69
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• A circuit in which any spark or any thermal effect produced in the


conditions specified in the standard IEC 60079‐11 which includes
normal operation and specified fault conditions is not capable of
causing ignition of a given explosive atmosphere.
• Intrinsic Safety is a widely used method of explosion protection. It
is used for very low power applications only, and typical examples
are control and instrumentation circuits.

 ZONES OF USE:
• 0, 1 & 2 (Exi "a")
• 1 & 2 (Exi "b")

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 70
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF INTRINSIC SAFETY:


Co

• Intrinsically Safe circuits achieve safety by maintaining very low


energy levels such that hot surfaces will not be produced, and
electrical sparks, if they occur, will have insufficient energy to ignite
the most easily ignitable concentration of a flammable mixture.
• This is achieved by limiting the voltage and current supplied to the
apparatus in the hazardous area.
• To maintain safety, it is of paramount importance that these levels
of voltage and current are not exceeded under normal, or even
fault conditions.
• The circuit parameters, i.e. voltage, current, resistance, inductance
and capacitance are factors which have to be considered in the
design of an IS circuit.
• Consultation with the characteristic ignition curves given in the
construction standard, and the application of appropriate safety

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
factors, will ensure that safe values are established for these
parameters during the design stage.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 71
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

 An IS system, which usually comprises a safe to hazardous area


interface, cables, junction boxes and field (hazardous) area
apparatus, must also be designed in such a way as to guard
against the possibility of particular faults occurring.

 In contrast to other methods of explosion protection, intrinsic


safety is a system concept which applies to the whole system and

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
not to any one item only.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 72
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Apparatus in the safe area connected directly to apparatus in the


Co

hazardous area is known as "associated apparatus", and each


item making up the system will have a Certificate of Conformity.
Associated apparatus may be used in the hazardous area if
installation is within another method of explosion protection, e.g.
flameproof. In addition, the system may be covered by an overall
system certificate. The maximum operating voltage for safe area
apparatus is 250 Vrms.

 Advantages of IS are:
• live maintenance is possible
• cost effective – certified enclosures not required and ordinary
wiring may be used

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• safe – low voltage not harmful to personnel
• can be used in Zone 0

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 73
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 THE ZENER BARRIER:


Co

• The faults which can jeopardise the security of IS systems are either
overvoltage or overcurrent, and protection against these conditions
is afforded by the use of an interface, typically a Zener barrier.
• The interface, which is connected between the safe area and
hazardous area apparatus, is normally located in the safe area and
situated as close as possible to the boundary with the hazardous
area, but may be located in the hazardous area if installed in a
flameproof enclosure.

• A simple zener barrier has three principal components:


− (1) a resistor,
− (2) a zener diode,

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− (3) a fuse,
all of which must have infallible properties.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 74
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Resistor: purpose is to limit the current to the IS apparatus.


Co

Infallibility, with regard to the current limiting resistor, means that


in the event of it failing, failure will be to a higher resistance value
or open‐circuit. Infallibility will be satisfied by the use of a quality
wire‐wound or metal film resistor, and its operating power, as
required in the standards, should not exceed 2/3 of its maximum
quoted rating for a specified ambient rating.

• Zener diode: purpose is to limit the voltage available to the


apparatus in the hazardous area. The Zener diode, as a single item,
is not considered to be an infallible component, must also be
operated at only 2/3 of its maximum stated rating. For infallibility
to be satisfied, the Zener diode is required to fail to a short‐circuit.
Tests by manufacturers have shown that diodes virtually always fail

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
to a short‐circuit state, but there can be no guarantee of this.
Diodes can only be considered infallible when two or more are
connected in parallel as discussed later.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 75
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Fuse: purpose is to protect the Zener diodes, and not to protect


Co

against, for example, a short‐circuit in the field apparatus.


Infallibility of the fuse is assured by the use of a sand‐filled ceramic
type capable of operating properly even when exposed to a
prospective fault‐current of up to 4000 A. A fuse of this type avoids,
namely vaporisation which can allow the fuse to continue to
conduct.
The fuse is encapsulated along with the other components of the
barrier to deter replacement. The repair of Zener barriers is not
permissible, even by the manufacturer.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 76
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ZENER BARRIER OPERATION:


Co

• In the event of a short‐circuit developing in the apparatus in the


hazardous area, or across the IS wiring, the series resistor in the
zener barrier will limit the short‐circuit current to a safe level so
that the integrity of the system is maintained.

• If a voltage greater than the normal maximum voltage of the IS


system invades the circuit at the input terminals of the zener

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
barrier, this will trigger the Zener diode, and the resulting fault
current will be shunted to earth. The excessive voltage is, therefore,
prevented from reaching the apparatus in the hazardous area.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 77
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CATEGORIES OF IS:
Co

• Two categories of intrinsic safety are available, "ia" and "ib", the level, of
safety provided by each being dependent on the number of component
faults which are considered.
• Category "ib" will maintain safety in the event of one fault occurring.
• Category "ia" is required to maintain safety should two simultaneous
faults occur.
• Clearly, for the Zener barrier (interface) to maintain safety with one or two
faults, additional zener diodes are necessary since they are the
components most likely to fail.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Therefore, the addition of a second Zener diode, connected in parallel with
the first, will satisfy the requirements of category "ib" intrinsic safety in
which safety is assured with one fault. A third zener diode connected in
parallel with the other two will satisfy the conditions for category "ia"
intrinsic safety in which safety is assured with two faults.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 78
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Category "ib" intrinsic safety may be used in Zones 1 and 2, but not
Co

Zone 0, and category "ia" intrinsic safety is permitted in Zones 0, 1


and 2.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 79
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 MINIMUM IGNITION CURRENT CURVES:


Co

• Voltage and current limitation in an IS


circuit shall ensure operational safety.
• The design of the circuit will be based on
the minimum ignition current curves
given in the construction standard.
• The following curves give the
determining maximum circuit resistance,
inductance and capacitance respectively.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 80
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 EARTHING:
Co

• A dedicated high‐integrity earth is a vital factor in maintaining the


security of IS circuits, particularly when Zener barriers are used.
• Galvanic barriers, however, operate on a different principle which
does not require a high‐integrity earth, but earthing may be used
for interference suppression.
• The earth bars on which Zener barriers are mounted are insulated
from the surrounding metalwork and connected directly to the
main earth point via separate earthing conductors.
• Two cables, each secured at separate points at either end, are
normally used to connect the barrier earth bar to the main earth
point to facilitate earth resistance tests which must be periodically
carried out.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 81
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• The resistance between the barrier earth bar and the main earth
Co

point should not be greater than 1 . A value of 0.1  is not


unrealistic.
• The earth cable must be insulated, and the insulation undamaged,
along it’s entire length so that contact with the plant metalwork is
avoided: where the risk of damage is high, mechanical protection
for the cables should be provided.
• The earth conductors must have a rating capable of carrying the
maximum fault current and have an appropriate cross‐sectional
area (csa) by means of:
− at least two separate 1.5 mm² (minimum) copper conductors, or
− at least one 4 mm² (minimum) copper conductor.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Note: the IS circuit in the hazardous area must be able to withstand a 500 V insulation
resistance test to earth.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 82
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 83
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 GALVANIC ISOLATED BARRIERS:


Co

• Barriers have been, and continue to be, widely used in industry,


they have particular limitations which are:
− a dedicated high‐integrity earth is necessary to divert fault currents
away from the hazardous area.
− a direct connection exists between the hazardous and safe area
circuits and earth, which tends to apply constraints on the rest of the
system.
− hazardous area apparatus must withstand a 500 V insulation
resistance test to earth.
• Devices which overcome these difficulties are isolation interfaces
typically relays, opto isolators and transformers. The purpose is to
isolate IS circuits from NIS circuits, from supply and from ground.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 84
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 INSTALLATION OF IS APPARATUS:
Co

• The apparatus which make up an IS installation, i.e. field apparatus,


associated apparatus and interface units, are required to be certified. Such
apparatus, including interconnecting cables, must be installed in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions and with regard to the
recommendations in EN60079‐14.
 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLES:
• Conductors of IS cables to be insulated with a minimum thickness of 0.3
mm. Colour for IS cables (and terminals) is recommended to be blue.
 Armouring or screening of cables for mechanical protection is not required
except for IS circuits with multi‐core cables in Zone 0.
 Where IS cables and the cables of other circuits share the same duct, bundle or
tray, both types of circuit must be segregated by means of an insulated or
earthed metal partition.
 Separation is not necessary if either the IS cables or the cables of the other

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
circuit are armoured, screened or metal sheathed.
 The armouring of cables must be securely bonded to the plant earth.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 85
ng
ni
Intrinsic safety "i"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Where the interconnecting cables of IS circuits have overall screens, or groups


Co

of conductors with individual screens, the screens are required to be earthed


at one point only, usually the barrier earth bar.

 The individual screens must be insulated from one another and, prior to
connection of the screens to the barrier earth bar, an insulation resistance (IR.)
test should be carried out between each pair of screens.

 The test readings should not be less than 1 M/km when measured at 500 V at
20 °C for 1 minute.

 Overall screens are required to be insulated from the external metalwork, i.e.
cable tray etc.

 Unused cable cores must be connected to the IS earth at the interface, and
insulated elsewhere by means of connection to terminals which are identified

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
in the documentation.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 86
ng
ni
Oil immersion "o"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• A type of protection in which the electrical apparatus or parts of


the electrical apparatus are immersed in oil in such a way that an
explosive atmosphere, which may be above the oil or outside the
enclosure, cannot be ignited.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 87
ng
ni
Oil immersion "o"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ZONES OF USE: 1 & 2.


Co

 PRINCIPLE:
• The oil level is used to completely cover the components within the
apparatus which arc/spark or produce hot surfaces during normal
operation, establishing a barrier between the components below
the oil and any flammable gases which may be present above the
oil or outside the enclosure.

• One function of the oil is to quench arcs occurring at the contacts


and, where mineral oil is used.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 88
ng
ni
Oil immersion "o"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CONSTRUCTION:
Co

• The construction standard requires a breather to be fitted to the


apparatus to allow release of the flammable gases produced during arc
quenching. The enclosure ingress protection must be IP66.
• A gauge must display the highest and lowest levels of oil.
• In the event of breakage of the gauge, even at it’s lowest point, the
minimum depth of oil remaining above the arc/heat producing
components, after leakage of oil at this point, should not be less than 25
mm.
• The free surface temperature of the protective liquid is required to be 25 K
less than the specified minimum flashpoint for the protective liquid.
• Sealed enclosures are required to be fitted with a pressure‐relief device.
• Non‐sealed enclosures must be with an expansion device incorporateing a
mechanism for automatic tripping of the electrical supply on detection of

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
gas evolution from the protective liquid as a result of a fault within the
enclosure. The trip mechanism may only be manually reset.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 89
ng
ni
Powder filling "q"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• A type of protection in which the enclosure of electrical apparatus


is filled with a material in a finely granulated state so that, in the
intended conditions of service, any arc occurring within the
enclosure of an electrical apparatus will not ignite the surrounding
atmosphere. No ignition shall be caused either by flame or by
excessive temperature of the surfaces of the enclosure.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 90
ng
ni
Powder filling "q"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ZONES OF USE: 1& 2.


Co

 PRINCIPLE:
• The filling, usually quartz, achieves safety by what is known as "suppression of
flame propagation".
• Flammable gas or vapour may permeate the granules and reach the parts
producing arcs/sparks or hot surfaces.
• The quantity of gas or vapour, however, will be too small to support an explosion
within the inert powder.
 CONSTRUCTION:
• The enclosure, which holds the filling material, is required to withstand, for one
minute, an overpressure of 0.5 mBar (0.05 kPa) without permanent deflection of
the walls in any direction by more than 0.5 mm, and maintain a minimum level of
ingress protection to IP54.
• The size of granules for the filling material, usually quartz, must be within the
range 250 m – 1.6 mm.
• The relative weight of water which can permeate the filling material must not be in
excess of 0.1%.
• This method of protection is unsuitable where moving parts are involved since the

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
filling material must be free of voids.
• Application is found with capacitors integrated in increased safety luminaires.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 91
ng
ni
Encapsulation "m"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• A type of protection in which the parts which could ignite an


explosive atmosphere by either sparking or heating are enclosed in
a compound in such a way that this explosive atmosphere cannot
be ignited.

 ZONES OF USE: 1 & 2


 PRINCIPLE:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• An encapsulant, typically a thermo‐setting compound, establishes a
complete barrier between any surrounding flammable gas or
vapour and the source of ignition within the compound.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 92
ng
ni
Encapsulation "m"

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CONSTRUCTION:
Co

• The construction standards state that the encapsulant must be free


of voids and, therefore, this method of protection is unsuitable
where components have exposed moving parts.

• Very small components which have enclosed moving parts, e.g. a


reed relay, may be protected by encapsulation.

• The minimum depth of encapsulant above the components of, say,


a printed circuit board is 3 mm, and must be able to withstand a 7 J
impact test.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• The encapsulant depth may be reduced to 1 mm for very small
apparatus where the free surface area is not in excess of 2 cm².

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 93
ng
ni
Special protection "s" (only IEC)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DEFINITION:
Co

• Apparatus which has not quite met the requirements of a particular


construction standard may be additionally certified under Standard
"Special Protection Ex s".
 ZONES OF USE: 0, 1 & 2.
 PRINCIPLE:
• The constructional requirements of this standard, in terms of test and
acceptance criteria, is intended to be unspecific in order to allow a broad
range of designs to be considered for certification. The experience of test‐
house staff plays an important part in writing appropriate tests and
acceptance criteria.
• A hand torch is a typical example of apparatus certified under Special
Protection.
• Thorough testing will have established that the construction is robust
enough to withstand a specified impact without causing, for example, a
short‐circuit of the battery, and breakage of the bulb, its holder and the
glass cover are unlikely.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• A further requirement is that opening of the torch, i.e. to replace the
battery, is only possible with the aid of a special tool, which is required to
be kept in a non‐hazardous area.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 94
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

Electrical equipment may be manufactured with more than one


rig


py

method of explosion protection.


Co

 Equipment of this type has combined methods of protection.


 Such an approach combines the best features of each type of
protection into one piece of equipment for both economic and
practical purposes.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 95
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A traditional push‐button station for use in an hazardous location


Co

comprises a flameproof Ex d enclosure, in which a standard


industrial switch is fitted.

 An alternative to this arrangement is an Increased Safety Ex e


enclosure with a small flameproof Ex d component certified
switch fitted inside.

 The switch producing sparks in normal operation, must be


flameproof to comply with the Increased Safety concept of
protection.

 Such equipment will be marked Ex de.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 96
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The advantages of the hybrid arrangement discussed over the


Co

traditional flameproof method are:


• lower cost and weight
• glanding arrangements are simplified
• minimum ingress protection IP54 but may be as high as IP66.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 97
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 MOTORS ‐ Ex de
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 98
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The main body of the motor is


Co

flameproof Ex d and the


terminal box increased safety
Ex e.

 An alternative terminal plate


is fitted to a motor of this type
to accommodate special
terminals which are screwed
into the terminal plate. These
are hybrid terminals, i.e. they
employ both flameproof Ex d
and increased safety Ex e
concepts in their construction.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 99
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 TERMINAL BOX
Co

• Ingress protection is ensured by gaskets fitted between the


terminal box and it’s cover, between the terminal plate and box,
and between the gland plate and terminal box.

• On no account, however, should a gasket be fitted between the


terminal plate and the frame of the motor as this joint is a
flamepath.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 100
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 LUMINAIRES Ex edq:
Co

• The lighting fitting illustrated below employs three protection concepts,


i.e. increased safety type "e", flameproof type "d" and powder filling type
"q". This type of fitting is widely used in the petro‐chemical industry.

 The constructional features are:


1. flameproof lampholders;
2. increased safety choke designed not to overheat if lamp fails;
3. temperature rating based on internal and external surface temperatures;
4. enclosure sealing providing high ingress protection;
5. increased safety enclosure including glands designed to withstand

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
specified impact.
 In this luminary, the circuits include capacitors which are protected by a
method of protection, powder filling type "q". Switches will be of flameproof
type "d" construction and terminals will be increased safety type "e".
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 101
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Ex e m ib:
Co

• A typical example is a telephone for use in a hazardous location.


• The casing of the telephone would use increased safety type "e"
protection, most of the internal circuits would be intrinsically safe,
type "i", but part of the circuitry would operate at a higher voltage
and therefore encapsulation type "m" would be used to protect
that part of the circuit.
• Terminals would be increased safety type "e".

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 102
ng
ni
Combined (hybrid) methods of protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Ex pde:
Co

• Enclosures which employ the protection concept, pressurisation


type "p", may have internal apparatus which have to remain
energised in the absence of overpressure.
• Such apparatus must be protected in accordance with the Zone in
which the enclosure is located.
• A typical example is an anti‐condensation heater within a
pressurised machine which will be energised when the machine is
idle.
• Apparatus outwith the machine, e.g. junction boxes, pressure
sensors etc., will also have to be protected in accordance with the
Zone.

Note: since anti‐condensation heaters are 

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
normally "live" when a machine is idle, notices 
warning of this danger should be displayed.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 103


ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Inspection, maintenance

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 104
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 RISK of mechanical damage to apparatus but also risk due to other factors
Co

(environmental conditions, etc) may affect the integrity of the apparatus and
allow ignition.
 Apparatus will only remain approved/certified if it is maintained in accordance
with the recommendations provided by manufacturers and relevant standards.
 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL:
• Personnel involved in the selection, installation, inspection and
maintenance of explosion protected apparatus in hazardous areas must
have a clear understanding of the various protection concepts, installation
practices and regulations, and the general principles of area classification.
• Manufacturers have gone to great lengths to design and build apparatus in
accordance with relevant standards and have it tested and certified by a
third party test house to ensure the apparatus is safe for use in hazardous
areas.
• All this effort will have been in vain if the technician in the field does not

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
have the necessary knowledge to install and/or maintain apparatus in
accordance with the manufacturers requirements, relevant standards and
Codes of Practice.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 105


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Personnel operating in this field must, therefore, have appropriate


Co

training, and thereafter, regular refresher training.


• Apparatus may be explosion protected at the time of leaving the
manufacturers premises but, the way the apparatus is subsequently
handled, selected, installed and maintained, will have an influence
on whether the apparatus will be safe for use in an hazardous area
and/or remain certified.
• Personnel need to be aware of, for example, the consequences of a
broken foot on a flameproof motor. Increased Safety apparatus
may have "special conditions of use" and failure to observe these
will reduce margins of safety and invalidate the certification.
• Incorrect selection of cable glands with regard to, for example,
flameproof apparatus will affect the integrity of such apparatus.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 106
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 PRINCIPAL CAUSES OF APPARATUS DETERIORATION:


Co

• Table 4 of IEC 60079‐17 lists major factors which have a significant


effect on the deterioration of equipment in hazardous locations.
These factors are listed below:
− Susceptibility to corrosion
− Exposure to chemicals or solvents
− Likelihood of accumulation of dust or dirt
− Likelihood of water ingress
− Exposure to excessive ambient temperatures
− Risk of mechanical damage
− Exposure to undue vibration
− Training and experience of personnel
− Likelihood of unauthorised modifications or adjustments

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− Likelihood of inappropriate maintenance, for example not in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 107


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 STANDARDS:
Co

EN60079‐17: electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres:


Part 17. Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in
hazardous areas (other than mines).

• This Standard comprises a series of Tables for the inspection of the


various methods of explosion protection.

• Table 1 is an inspection schedule which lists the areas to be


inspected for the types of apparatus Ex d, Ex e and Ex n.

• Table 2 and Table 3 are schedules for the inspection of IS apparatus

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
and Pressurised Ex p apparatus respectively.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 108


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• For each type of explosion protection, three grades of inspection


Co

are specified which are "visual", "close" and "detailed" and defined
as follows:
− Visual: an inspection which identifies, without the use of access
equipment or tools, those defects, e.g. missing bolts, which will be
apparent to the eye.
− Close: an inspection which encompasses those aspects covered by a
Visual Inspection and, in addition, identifies those defects, e.g. loose
bolts, which will be apparent only by the use of access equipment, e.g.
step ladders (where necessary), and tools. Close inspections do not
normally require the enclosure to be opened, or the equipment to be
de‐energised.
− Detailed: an inspection which encompasses those aspects covered by a
Close Inspection and, in addition, identifies those defects, e.g. loose
termination’s, which will only be apparent by opening the enclosure,

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
and/or using, where necessary, tools and test equipment.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 109


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 DOCUMENTATION:
Co

• Prior to the implementation of an inspection / maintenance


programme it is essential that all necessary documentation is
available (hazardous area drawings, complete inventory of all
hazardous area equipment installed in the plant including their
location, date Records of all previous Inspections and Maintenance
tasks carried out).

• Also Certification Documents for each item of explosion protected


apparatus must be available The maintenance of comprehensive
records is thus an essential requirement for the safe operation of
electrical equipment in hazardous areas.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 110
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 INSPECTION TYPES:
Co

• Three types of inspection are specified in IEC or EN60079‐17.


These are:
− initial inspection
− periodic inspection
− sample inspection.

• The electrical installations should be subjected to an "initial


inspection" before being brought into service to establish that the
types of protection selected, and their method of installation are
suitable.

• The grade of inspection shall be "detailed" in accordance with

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Tables 1, 2 and 3 of EN60079‐17.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 111


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Thereafter, "periodic inspections" should be implemented to verify


Co

that the installation is being maintained in an appropriate condition


for continued use in the hazardous area.
• The grade of inspection for "periodic inspections" may be "visual"
or "close" and should be carried out at regular intervals, the
frequency of which will be influenced by the environmental
conditions.
• Depending on the outcome of a "visual/close inspection", it may be
necessary to carry out a further "detailed inspection".
• Factors having an influence on the frequency and grade of "periodic
inspections" are:
− type of apparatus
− manufacturers recommendations
− environmental conditions
− zone of use

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
− results of previous inspections

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 112


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 It is recommended that, however, the interval between "periodic inspections"


Co

does not exceed three years. Interim "sample inspections" may be


implemented to either support or modify the frequency of "periodic
inspections" and may be of a grade "Visual" or "Close".

 The flowchart overleaf illustrates how a typical maintenance programme may


be established and how the various grades of inspection, i.e. "visual", "close"
or "detailed", may be applied during the various types of inspection, i.e.
"initial", "periodic" or "sample".

 Consideration is also given to frequency of periodic inspections.

 Note: * I.C.
I.C. appearing in the flowchart below infers that electrical equipment contains
components which are ignition capable in normal operation. Typical
components are switches, contactors, relays etc. which produce ignition

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
capable arcs or sparks at their contacts, and, for example, resistors which may
produce excessive surface temperatures.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 113


ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

Typical inspection 
Co

procedure for periodic 
inspections

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 114
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 INSPECTION SCHEDULES:
Co

• The inspection schedules illustrated in Tables 1, 2 and 3 of IEC


60079‐17 relate to the methods of protection types "d", "e", "n";
"i" and "p" respectively.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 115
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

IEC 60079‐17:
py

Table 1: Inspection Schedule for Ex "d", 
Co

Ex "e", and Ex "n" Installations 
(D = Detailed, C = Close, V = Visual)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 116
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

IEC 60079‐17: 
py

Table 3: Inspection Schedule for Ex "p" 
Co

Installations (pressurised or continuous 
dilution)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 117
ng
ni
Inspection, maintenance

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

IEC 60079‐17: 
py

Table 2: Inspection Schedule for 
Co

Ex "i" Installations

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 A 118
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

BASIC DATA –Explosive Atmospheres

P. Leroux
January 2007
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P FLAMMABLE (EXPLOSIVE) LIMITS (1/2)
ht
rig
py
Co

• Combustion will only occur if the flammable mixture comprising


fuel, in the form of a gas or vapour and air, is within certain limits.
These limits are :
 The LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (LEL)
 The UPPER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT (UEL)
• Between these limits is known as the FLAMMABLE RANGE.

FLAMMABLE RANGE

0 LEL UEL
100%
concentration
No combustion EXPLOSION No combustion of fuel in air
(lack of fuel) (lack of oxygen)

P. Leroux
2
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P FLAMMABLE (EXPLOSIVE) LIMITS (2/2)
ht
rig
py

• These limits depend on :


Co

 Pressure : if pressure increases (more gas in a same volume), LEL


decreases (increasing the flammable range).
 Temperature : if temperature increases, flammability increases
too.
 Oxygen : if O2 content increases, LEL does not change a lot but
UEL increases considerably.

AIR INCREASED OXYGEN


Concentration % LEL UEL LEL UEL
Methane 5 15 5,2 79
Hydrogen 4 75 4,7 94
Propane 2,2 9,5 2,3 55
Petrol (car) 1,4 7,4

• For a mixture, the smaller LEL has to be taken into account.


P. Leroux
3
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P FLASH POINT (1/3)
ht
rig
py
Co

• FLASH POINT is the lowest temperature at which sufficient vapour is given off a
liquid, to form a flammable mixture with air that can be ignited by an arc, spark,
naked flame, etc.

Amount of vapour released dependant on temperature.

• FLASH POINT of a material gives an indication of how readily that material will
ignite in normal ambient temperature.
• Explosion of gas or vapour is possible when the ambient temperature becomes
greater than the flash point of the flammable material.
• High flash point liquids are less hazardous than low flash point liquids.
• Practically liquids with flash point above 55° C are not liable to generate a
hazardous area, unless they are likely to be submitted to a temperature above
this flash point.

P. Leroux
4
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P FLASH POINT (1/3)
ht
rig
py
Co

• FLASH POINT is the lowest temperature at which sufficient vapour is given off a
liquid, to form a flammable mixture with air that can be ignited by an arc, spark,
naked flame, etc.

Amount of vapour released dependant on temperature.

• FLASH POINT of a material gives an indication of how readily that material will
ignite in normal ambient temperature.
• Explosion of gas or vapour is possible when the ambient temperature becomes
greater than the flash point of the flammable material.
• High flash point liquids are less hazardous than low flash point liquids.
• Practically liquids with flash point above 55° C are not liable to generate a
hazardous area, unless they are likely to be submitted to a temperature above
this flash point.

P. Leroux
5
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P FLASH POINT (2/3)
ht
rig
py
Co

MATERIAL FLASH POINT °C


Methane gas
Propane -104 (gas)
Ethylene -120 (gas)
Octane 13
Petrol -37
Diesel oil 55
Kerosene 38

P. Leroux
6
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P FLASH POINT (3/3)
ht
rig
py
Co

Kerosene : flashpoint 38°C

at 35°C,

P. Leroux
7
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P AREA CLASSIFICATION (1/3)
ht
rig
py

• An hazardous area is an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere is


Co

present, or may be expected to be present in quantitites such as to


require special precautions for the construction, installation and use of
apparatus.
• A non hazardous area (safe area) is an area in which an explosive
atmosphere is not expected to be present.

ZONES
• Zoning is a means of representing the frequency of the occurrence
and duration of an explosive gas atmosphere based on the identification
and consideration of each and every source of release in the given areas
of an installation.
• Hazardous areas are therefore divided into 3 zones which represent this
risk in terms of the probability, frequency and duration of a release.

P. Leroux
8
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P AREA CLASSIFICATION (2/3)
ht
rig
py

• DEFINITIONS as per CENELEC 60079-10 / IEC 60079-10 :


Co

 Zone 0 : in this Zone, an explosive gas atmosphere is continuously


present, or present for long periods.
 Zone 1 : in this Zone, an explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur
in normal operation.
 Zone 2 : in this Zone, an explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to
occur in normal operation and, if it does occur, is likely to do so only
infrequently and will exist for a short period only.

Although not specified in the standards, it is accepted in the industry


that the duration of a gas release, or a number of gas releases on an
annual basis (1 year = 8 760 hours) is :

 Zone 0 > 1 000 h


 Zone 1 10 - 1 000 h
 Zone 2 0 - 10 h

P. Leroux
9
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P AREA CLASSIFICATION (3/3)
ht
rig
py

• Example of zone 0 : space above liquid in a closed tank.


Co

• Example of zone 1 : confined space (with gas lighter than air).

• Example of zone 2 : flanged joint.

P. Leroux
10
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

14. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR 
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES (contin…)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

THE  ATEX DIRECTIVES
94/9/EC & 1999/92/EC
« New regulations and rules for explosive 
atmospheres in Europe »

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 2
ng
ni
Atex directives

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht

 DEFINITION
rig
py

• ATEX: French acronym for « ATmosphères EXplosibles », used worldwide.


Co

• DIRECTIVE: LAW in all the European Union countries (U.E.).


European directives are transposed into national LAW in all the European
Union (E.U.) countries to become applicable. Also EFTA countries have
decided to apply the E.U. regulations without being E.U. member states.

A DIRECTIVE IS A EUROPEAN REGULATION

 APPLICATION
• Since the 1st of July 2003, TWO main ATEX directives for equipment in
explosive atmospheres have been in force:
ATEX directive 94/9/EC ATEX directive 1999/92/EC

 Also known as ATEX 100a and ATEX 95  Also known as ATEX 118 and ATEX 137
 Work equipment, "Product" directive  Work place, "User" directive

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Duties on manufacturers  Duties on workers & employers

 MAJOR MODIFICATIONS FOR THE SELECTION AND USE OF EQUIPMENT 
INSTALLED IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 3
ng
ni
European union

ai
Tr
P
IF
E.U.: European Union (25 countries)
ht

E.F.T.A.: European Free Trade Association (Norway, Iceland, Liechtenstein)
rig

E.E.A.: European Economic Area = E.U. + E.F.T.A.
py

ATEX
Co

The access to the European


market

27 COUNTRIES IN 2012

450 MILLION INHABITANTS

Applicants to the EU
• Croatia: ?
• Turkey: ?

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 4
ng
ni
ATEX directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 OBJECTIVES
Co

• Free movement for products (by removing barriers to trade).


• Increase safety of products (ATEX 94/9/EC) and workers (ATEX
1999/92/EC).

 "NEW APPROACH DIRECTIVE"


• No longer based on application of mandatory European standards
(CENELEC).
• Based on Essential Health and Safety Requirements (EHSR).
• Any standard may be used, provided it meets the EHSR’s.
• Application of the harmonised European CENELEC standards gives
only a presumption of conformity to the directive.
• Global concept for safety (other risks than electrical now included).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Affixation of the CE marking is the manufacturer responsibility
(directive requirements met).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 5
ng
ni
Situation before the 1st of July 2003 (Old approach)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 "Old approach" directives were 76/117/EEC for surface industries


Co

and 82/130/EEC for mines.


 Electrical equipment had to be certified by a state approved body
(laboratory) in conformity with the European standards (CENELEC
50014 and upwards) covering each type of protection (d, e, p, i,
m, o, q, n).
 Conformity assessment
• European "Certificate of conformity": strict compliance.
• National "Certificate of control": not strictly in compliance, but
offering at least the same degree of safety.

 Application of directive ATEX 94/9/EC before 1st of July 2003 had


been possible since the beginning of 1997 but on a voluntary

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
basis (no obligation).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 6
ng
ni
Situation after the 1st of July 2003 –

ai
Tr
P ATEX 94/9/EC Directive Summary
IF
ht
rig
py

 TITLE: Directive 94/9/EC of 23 March 1994 on the approximation


Co

of the laws of the Member States concerning equipment and


protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres:
• Defines essential health and safety requirements (EHSRs).
• No direct references to standards.
• Applies to electrical and non‐electrical equipment.
• Applies to environments which are potentially explosive due to gas
and dust hazards.
• Takes into consideration all potential hazards equipment may
cause, in particular at design and production level.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 7
ng
ni
Situation after the 1st of July 2003 –

ai
Tr
P ATEX 94/9/EC Directive Summary
IF
ht
rig
py

• The one directive applies to both mines susceptible to fire damp,


Co

and surface industries.


• Recognizes the European Standards Committee CEN and the
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization CENELEC
as competent bodies to define the required harmonized standards.
• Defines procedures for assessment of conformity (certification) to
essential requirements, on the basis of annexes which qualify
equipment to bear the CE marking, which is the "passport" for sale
into the E.U. / E.F.T.A. countries.
• Notified Bodies (N.B.’s) provide the professional and independent
judgements which enable manufacturers to fulfil the procedures in
order to presume conformity to the directive.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 8
ng
ni
ATEX directive 94/9/EC – "Product" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 NEW APPROACH
Co

Obligation of results (EHSR) and not of means (standards)
 ADVANTAGE
• Laws remain fundamentally the same and applicable to minimum
EHSR.
• No longer necessary to make an adaptation (amendments to
standards, standards harmonisation, new directive, transposition in
national law…) in order to keep up with technical developments.

 DRAWBACKS
• End user to specify to which standards or codes the equipment
must be manufactured.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• End user to verify to which procedures the equipment has been
certified.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 9
ng
ni
What is the type of equipment affected by the "product" 

ai
Tr
P directive?
IF
ht
rig
py

 Equipment (machines including internal combustion engines, apparatus, fixed


Co

or mobile devices, control and instrumentation components, etc.).

 Protective systems (explosion relief systems, flame arresters, etc.).

 Components (item essential to the safe functioning of equipment and


protective systems but with no autonomous function: terminals, push button,
relays, empty flame proof enclosures, ballast for fluorescent lamps, etc.).

 Safety, controlling and regulating devices intended for use outside potentially
explosive atmospheres but required for the safe functioning of equipment or
protective systems with respect to the risk of explosions.
These safety devices were not covered by the old approach directive, e.g.:
• Fire and gas controller (control panel).
• Protective relay for Ex«e» motor.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• IS interface.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 10
ng
ni
What is the type of equipment excluded by the "product" 

ai
Tr
P directive?
IF
ht
rig

 Medical devices.
py
Co

 Equipment and protective systems where the explosion hazards result


exclusively from the presence of explosive substances or unstable chemical
substances.
 Equipment intended for use in domestic and non‐commercial environments.
 Personal protective equipment covered by directive 89/686/EEC.
 Seagoing vessels and mobile offshore units (such as semi‐submersible
platforms, drilling jack up platforms)*, already covered by the IMO convention.
 Means of transport, except for vehicles intended for use in a potentially
explosive atmosphere.
* Fixed platforms, FPSO’s, FPP’s units are included in the scope (also vessels below 500t for navigation on river/lakes only).

 NOTE: Equipment with no specific ignition source does not fall within the scope of the
directive:

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• civil engineering, structural elements.
• pressure vessels.
• piping, metallic hoses, manually operated valves.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 11
ng
ni
ATEX categories and zones 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Equipment classification: CATEGORY


Co

Equipment Group I Mines (category M1‐M2)


Equipment Group II Surface (category 1‐2‐3)

• CATEGORY 1:
− 2 types of protection.
− In case of failure of one protection type, a second one (independent) must
ensure the required protection level.
− Even in case of rare faults:
• surface temperature
• temperature rise in the most unfavourable cases must always be mastered.
• residual energy
• CATEGORY 2:
− 1 type of protection
− Operational faults must be taken into account.
• CATEGORY 3:
− Required protection level for normal operation (no faults are taken into

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
account).
− Ignition sources to be avoided in normal operation.
− Surface temperature to be mastered.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 12
ng
ni
ATEX categories and zones 

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Area classification: ZONES


Co

• Definitions of zones are the same as the ones given in the IEC /
CENELEC standards IEC / CENELEC 60 079‐10 (classification of
hazardous areas).
− Zone 0‐1‐2 for gas, vapors, mist.
− Zone 20‐21‐22 for dust.

 Equipment and Area classification link?


− The link between Area classification, i.e. explosive atmospheres (zone)
and equipment category is defined in the ATEX directive 1999/92/EC
("USER"), annex II B.
− Determination is in relationship with:
• The level of safety requirement (including possible operating faults and 
"reasonable" possible misoperation).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Nature of inflammable substances.
• Degree of presence or duration of the explosive atmospheres.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 13
ng
ni
ATEX categories and zones

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

Safety level Very high High Normal

Workplace

Zone 0 Category 1 G

Zone 1 Category 2 G

Zone 2 Category 3 G

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Note: the above table gives the link between zone and equipment category, unless the Explosion 
Protection Document based on a risk assessment (as required by the User Directive) states otherwise.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 14
ng
ni
ATEX categories and zones

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 For GAS atmospheres: CAUTION!


Co

• Zone 0 requires category 1 equipment


• Zone 1 requires category 2 equipment
• Zone 2 requires category 3 equipment

 For DUST atmospheres :


• Zone 20 requires category 1 equipment.
• Zone 21 requires category 2 equipment.
• In Zone 22 area, conductive dust requires category 2 equipment and
IP6X protection.
• In Zone 22 area, non conductive dust requires category 3

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
equipment and IP5X protection.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 15
ng
ni
Potential ignition sources and other hazards to be 

ai
Tr
P controlled
IF
ht
rig
py

• Various sources of ignition, such as sparks, flames, electric arcs,


Co

high surface temperatures, acoustic energy, optical radiation or


electromagnetic waves
• Static electricity
• Stray electric and leakage current
• Overheating (friction, etc)
• Pressure compensation operations
• Disturbance from external sources, such as overloading, faults,
changing environmental conditions, extraneous voltage, humidity,
vibrations or contamination.
• Software (fault in the programme)
• Power failure

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Connections (conduits and cable entries)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 16
ng
ni
Conformity assessment procedures

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Serie equipment examination
py

Equipment Prototype examination Quality assurance


Co

Production Q.A.
Annex IV
CATEGORY EC type examination
by NB OR
1 Annex III Product verification
Annex V

Product Q.A.
Electrical equipment  EC type examination Annex VII EC declaration
& internal combustion by NB OR of conformity
engine Annex III Conformity to type by Manufacturer
CATEGORY Annex VI

2 Internal control
Communicate the 
Non electrical of production
Technical Dossier
equipment by Manufacturer
to N.B.
Annex VIII

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Internal control
CATEGORY of production
by Manufacturer
3 Annex VIII

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 17
ng
ni
Conformity assessment procedures (certification)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 In addition to the former mentioned procedures for category 1‐2‐3 equipment,


Co

the manufacturer may also follow the procedure relating to "unit verification"
(Annex IX) related to sub‐assemblies or assemblies.

 Certified product + certified product = certified assembly?
 New potential added risks must be assessed.
 For category 3 and non electrical equipment of category 2:
• Prototype is not subject to EC type examination.
• Series equipment are only subject to "internal control of production"
under the manufacturer’s responsibility (self‐certification); no N.B.
intervention.
− For category 2 non electrical equipment, the manufacturer must send to the
N.B. the relevant technical documentation (to allow equipment conformity
assessment). 10 years storage.
− For category 3 non electrical equipment, no obligation to send the technical
documentation to the N.B. (only to put it at the Authorities’ disposal).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 The manufacturer or his representative installed within the E.U. or E.F.T.A. is
the only person who can attest the conformity to the directive and to the other
relevant Directives and authorizes the CE marking.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 18
ng
ni
Equipment

ai
Tr
P CE marking Supplementary marking marking
Additional marking
IF
ht

εx
rig

CЄ 0081 II 2 G EEx d IIC T4


py

CE marking
Co

Identification of the Notified Body Complementary marking
responsible for the surveillance. specifying the type of
0081 = LCIE (example) protection

The European Commission mark EEX: manufactured in accordance with CENELEC 


for Ex products standards.
EX:  manufactured in accordance with IEC standards.
d: mode of protection:
Equipment group: II for surface industry flame proof.
(I = mines)
IIC:  gas sub‐division.

Equipment category: T4: temperature class.


1 for Zone 0 or 20,
2 for Zone 1 or 21

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
3 for Zone 2 or 22

Atmosphere surrounding the equipment
G for explosive gas, (D for dust) 
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 19
ng
ni
Other examples of marking

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 NON ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


Co

• CE0102 II 2 G C T3

 ASSEMBLY PUMP + MOTOR


• Pump: II2G IIB T4
• Motor: II2G IIB T3
• Assembly: II2G IIB T4
(as the motor is the part that meets the lower requirements)

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 20
ng
ni
Ec type examination certificate number

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

SIRA 04 ATEX 123


Co

Serial number

Reference to ATEX 94/9/EC directive

Year of certification

Name of Notified Body performing EC type examination

Suffixes:
U – component certification
X – special conditions for safe use apply

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 21
ng
ni
Other directives applicable for Atex equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Equipment / materials must be also in conformity with the other


Co

applicable directives:
• Directive "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC) 89/336 EEC
• Directive "Machinery" 98/37/EC
• Directive "Low voltage" (LVD) 73/23/EEC
only for safety, controlling and regulating devices
• Any other relevant directives

 The CE marking indicates that the product complies with all the
relevant EU directives.

IT IS NOT A QUALITY LABEL!

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 The εx marking indicates that the product complies with the ATEX
directive.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 22
ng
ni
Conformity documents under Atex directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The "Product" directive requires the following documents:


Co

• Issued by the Manufacturer on product delivery:


− EC Declaration of Conformity: declares conformity to ATEX Product
directive.
− Written Attestation of Conformity for Components: states
characteristics and how to be incorporated into equipment to conform
with EHSR.

• Issued by the N.B. to the Manufacturer (need not to accompany the


product to the user).
− EC Type Examination Certificate (cat. 1‐2: mandatory, cat. 3: optional).
− Quality Assessment Notification (as per directive ANNEXES).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 23
ng
ni
Conformity documents under atex directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

Written
py

Attestation
Co

of Conformity
(components)

CUSTOMER
EC Type 
Examination 
Certificate
Instructions
for use

MANUFACTURER

NOTIFIED BODY
EC Quality
Declaration  Assessment
of Conformity

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Notification

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 24
ng
ni
EC Declaration of conformity

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 25
ng
ni
EC Type examination certificate

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 26
ng
ni
Production quality assessment notification

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 27
ng
ni
Selection of explosion protected equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 CATEGORY  TYPE OF PROTECTION (d, e, p, i…)


Co

• The link is given in the corresponding CENELEC standard.

• The foreword states that this CENELEC standard covers the EHSR’s
of the ATEX "Product" directive and provides protection in
accordance with category 1 or 2 or 3 or M1 or M2.

• For a given category, several types of protection are proposed by


CENELEC standards, e.g.:
− Category 2 allows for "d", "p", "e", "i", "m", "o", "q" protection type.
− Category 3 allows for "n" protection type which includes itself 5
protection sub‐types: nA, nC, nR, nL, nP.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• End user to select the most appropriate type of protection.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 28
ng
ni
Selection of explosion protected equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 INTEREST OF CATEGORY INTRODUCTION?


Co

• If a new type of protection is offered by technology in the future,


no need to revise the directive, but only to indicate in the
corresponding standard (covering this new type of protection)
which category it applies to.

• In the past with the old approach directive, referring to specific


standards, a revision would have been necessary.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 29
ng
ni
Non electrical equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 New types of protection have been defined in a new series of CEN


Co

standards EN 13463‐1 to 8.
• Basic methods and requirements EN 13463‐1
Protection concept: list of ignition sources, risk analysis
methodology with examples.
• “fr” Flow restricting enclosure pr EN 13463‐2
Protection concept: tight seals of the enclosure. The seals restrict
the breathing of the enclosure as internal air heats and cools
through operation of the equipment.
• “d” Flame proof enclosure pr EN 13463‐3
Protection concept: as for electrical equipment.
• “g” Inherent safety pr EN 13463‐4
Protection concept: low potential energy.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 30
ng
ni
Non electrical equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• “c” Constructional safety EN 13463‐5


Co

Protection concept: ignition hazards are eliminated by the


specification of the equipment.
• “b” Control of ignition source pr EN 13463‐6
Protection concept: sources of ignition are only present in the event
of malfunction. The equipment is fitted with control equipment to
detect malfunction.
• “p” Pressurisation EN 13463‐7
Protection concept: as for electrical equipment.
• “k” Liquid immersion EN 13463‐8
Protection concept: similar to "o".

 Type of protection "c" shall be probably the type of protection


the most widely used.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 But EHSR’s can be met by application of other standards.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 31
ng
ni
Gas Turbines (G.T.)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 G.T. not normally placed on the market as a single functional unit but generally
Co

incorporated into other equipment by a packager.


 G.T. is not CE marked as a product.
 Risk analysis by the packager, preparation of an Explosion Protection
Document demonstrating that the G.T. package can operate safely under the
"User" Directive.
 Dilution / ventilation is the preferred option for G.T. to ensure non explosive
atmosphere.
 Dilution / ventilation must be designed so that a negligible risk of an explosive
atmosphere may occur (100 % standly fan / UPS to ventilation fans, interlocks
to prevent G.T. starting without sufficient ventilation, use of equipment –
group II as appropriate, etc).
 Instructions on safety are provided by the G.T. manufacturer to the packager /
Operator.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 Area of concern: hot surfaces!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 32
ng
ni
Non electrical equipment

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Many mechanical equipment are inherently safe but in some cases a few
Co

modifications / adjunctions have to be brought (adjunction of RTD’s…) to meet


the ATEX requirements.
 Valves (except manual valves) must be verified against possible source of
sparks (friction).
 High surface temperature on pipes/piping/vessels must be verified and must
remain below the Auto Ignition Temperature (A.I.T.) (ignored by the old
approach directive).
 Today mechanical equipment, in accordance with the ATEX directive
requirements, are available.
 Why ATEX directive has included "non electrical equipment"?
 It seems that the "Lawyer" has decided to use the "safety principle":

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
NO RISK AT ALL!

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 33
ng
ni
Dust explosion protection

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Dust is also considered as an explosive atmosphere by the ATEX


Co

directive.

 Protection is assumed to be met with the following:


• Tight enclosures: IP degree is a key factor.
• Limitation of surface temperature (depends on dust layer thickness,
or dust cloud).

 IEC 61 241 series and CENELEC EN 50 281 series cover the dust
ignition protection.

 Symbols:
• Formerly: IEC symbol: DIP (Dust Ignition Protection).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Today: tD, pD, iD, mD (D stands for DUST and is the European
symbol).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 34
ng
ni
Short comparison between "new & old approach" 

ai
Tr
P directives
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

OLD APPROACH NEW APPROACH (ATEX)


Equipment type Electrical (only) Electrical + non electrical

Atmosphere Gas (only) Gas + dust

Risks covered Electrical (only) All potential hazards (global concept for Safety)
- Level of Safety requirement category (1-2-3)
Equipment category -
- Link category / zone defined in the User directive
Applicable standards CENELEC standards imposed Any standard (provided it meets the EHSR)
- European : Certificate of Conformity (strict Certification by a Notified Body (EC type
compliance with CENELEC) examination certificate) or self certification by the
Certification
- National : Certificate of Control (not strictly in Manufacturer (depends on category of type of
compliance with CENELEC but OK with Safety) equipment)
Imposed in general terms but left to the discretion of
Manufacturer surveillance Addressed in more details through a series of
the EU member states for practical application
during production phase ANNEXES (no interpretation) (regular audit by NB)
(unequal application, various interpretation)
EC declaration of conformity (engages the
Putting on the market -

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
manufacturer responsibility)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 35
ng
ni
ATEX directive 1999/92/EC "User" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 TITLE: Minimum requirements for improving the safety and health protection
Co

of workers at risk from explosive atmospheres.


• Nothing similar did exist with the old approach.
• These are the minimum requirements but a E.U. country may decide to
add additional requirements.
 EXCLUDED: this directive does not apply to:
• Areas used for medical treatments of patients.
• Use of applicances burning gaseous fuels in accordance with Directive
90/396/EEC.
• Manufacture, handling, use, storage and transport of explosive or
chemical unstable substances.
• Mineral‐extracting industries* covered by Directive 92/91/EEC (drilling) or
Directive 92/104/EEC (mining).
• Means of transport by land, water and air to which the pertinent
provisions of the international agreements apply (e.g. ADNR, ADR, etc).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
* many oil and gas production facilities in the E.U. are covered by these directives(The Netherlands, France, etc).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 36
ng
ni
ATEX directive 1999/92/EC "User" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 OBLIGATIONS OF THE EMPLOYER:


Co

• Prevention of the formation of explosive atmospheres.


• Avoidance of the ignition of explosive atmospheres.
• Mitigation of the detrimental effects of an explosion.
• Explosion risks assessment taking into account:
− The likelihood of explosive atmospheres and their persistence.
− The likelihood of ignition sources, including electrostatic discharges.
− The installations, the substances used, processes and their possible
interactions.
− The scale of the anticipated effects.
• Where explosive atmospheres may arise, the working environment
is such that work can be performed safely, appropriate supervision
during the presence of workers is ensured, using appropriate

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
technical means.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 37
ng
ni
ATEX directive 1999/92/EC "User" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Duty of coordination: where workers from several undertakings are


Co

present at the same workplace, each employer shall be responsible for all
matters coming under his control.
• The employer responsible for the work place, in accordance with national
law and practice, shall coordinate the implementation of all the measures
concerning workers.
• The employer shall classify places where explosive atmospheres may occur
into zones (according to ANNEX 1, defining the zones 0‐1‐2 for gas
atmospheres and 20‐21‐22 for dust atmospheres).
• The employer shall ensure that the minimum requirements laid down in
the ANNEX IIA are applied:
− Training of workers.
− Written instruction and permits to work.
− Explosion protection measures:
• Flammable gases release suitably diverted or removed to a safe area.
• Workers provided with appropriate working clothes when electrostatic discharges 
may arise.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• Work places and work equipment designed, constructed, assembled, maintained 
and operated to minimise the risks of an explosion.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 38
ng
ni
ATEX directive 1999/92/EC "User" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• If an explosion occurs, minimise its propagation and protect workers from 
Co

physical effects
• Workers must be given optical and/or acoustic warning signs before the 
explosion conditions are reached.
• Escape facilities must be provided when required.
• Before a work place containing places where explosive atmospheres may 
occur is used for the first time, its overall explosion safety must be verified 
by a competent person.
• When the risk assessment shows it is necessary: 
• Provisions against power failure must be taken
• Manual override by competent workers
• Dissipate energy quickly and safely on operation of an ESD.

• Warning signs for location where explosive atmospheres may occur

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Ex

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 39
ng
ni
ATEX directive 1999/92/EC "User" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Preparation of the Explosion Protection Document (EPD)


Co

This document shall be drawn up and kept to date by the employer;


it will demonstrate that:
− The explosion risks have been determined and assessed.
− Adequate measures have been taken to attain the Directive’s aim.
− Work places have been classified into zones as per ANNEX I.
− Work places and work equipment, including warning devices, are
designed, operated and maintained with due regard to safety.
− Arrangements have been made for safe use of work equipment (as per
the Directive 89/655/EEC).
• The EPD shall be drawn up prior to the commencement of work and
revised when work place / work equipment or organisation are
subject to significant changes, extensions or conversions.

 The EPD shall be made available

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
for possible review by the AUTHORITIES.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 40
ng
ni
ATEX directive 1999/92/EC "User" directive

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Date of application for work equipment and work places:


Co

− New facilities: work places: 30/06/2003 (annex IIA and IIB)


work equipment: 30/06/2003

− Existing facilities: work places*: 30/06/2006 (only annex IIA)


work equipment**: 30/06/2003

− Modifications, extensions, restructuring made after the 30/06/2003:


30/06/2003.

• ANNEX IIA: minimum requirements for improving the safety and


health of workers.
• ANNEX IIB: criteria for the selection of equipment (category vs
zone).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
* The "USER" Directive is RETROACTIVE and applicable for existing facilities!
** The "PRODUCT" Directive is NOT RETROACTIVE (no recertification) BUT the employer must carry
out an assessment to demonstrate that the existing work equipment are still safe!
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 41
ng
ni
Atex directive 94/9/EC – TOTAL / E&P Viewpoint

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 ATEX directive 94/9/EC opens the door to INNOVATION, since any


Co

standard may be used, removing technical barriers to trade (aim


of the directive).

 Conformity assessment to the directive by a N.B. is only required


for category 1‐2 equipment (i.e for zone 0/20 and zone 1/21).

 Category 3 equipment (for zone 2‐22): no obligation for


certification by a N.B. (self‐certification authorized), due to the
low probability of an explosive atmosphere occurrence.

 Manufacturers installed outside Europe, through their authorized


representative (installed in the Community) are authorized to
affix the CE marking, which is the passport to Europe.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 42
ng
ni
ATEX directive 94/9/EC – TOTAL / E&P Viewpoint

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Frauds become possible from unscrupulous foreign


Co

manufacturers or their authorized representative (who may be


the importer) and who may not hesitate to affix the CE marking
to a product for which the EHSR’s are questionable!

 RISK FOR THE END USER WHO CAN BE DECEIVED!


Although provisions have been made in the directive for
sanctions against guilty manufacturers in case of deviations.

To avoid possible deviations TOTAL / E&P has decided the


following: Refer to
• GS ELE 079
• GS INS 101

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• GS MEC 290

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 43
ng
ni
TOTAL/E&P Requirements – ATEX directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

1. EC Type Examination Certificate


Co

• Requested by TOTAL / E&P for category 1‐2 of equipment (required by the


directive) and category 3 (not required by the directive).
2. EC Declaration of Conformity + Written Attestation of Conformity for
components
• Requested by TOTAL / E&P for any category of equipment (required by
the directive).
3. Category 3 electrical equipment
• To be "certified" by a N.B.  "type examination certificate" (Statement of
Compliances).
• No self certification by manufacturer shall be accepted.
4. STANDARDS
• Only CENELEC standards (harmonised or not) shall be recognised by
TOTAL / E&P
• IEC standards accepted too, provided they are identical to CENELEC

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
standards (it is not the case today). In the future IEC and CENELEC
standards should become identical (Dresden agreement).
• Other standards subject to formal TOTAL / E&P approval.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 44
ng
ni
TOTAL/E&P Requirements – ATEX directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

5. QUALITY ASSURANCE
Co

• TOTAL / E&P requires on all new or "suspect" manufacturers, or in


case of doubt about the quality / safety of the proposed product,
− a "Production quality assessment" notification (for category 1)
− a "Product quality assurance" notification (for category 2 and 3)
• These notifications are delivered by the N.B. to the manufacturer
after successful audit at manufacturer’s workshops.
• These various "quality assurance" of the products / production are
new and appreciated by TOTAL / E&P (better confidence in
products quality).
• Yet TOTAL / E&P regrets that nothing has been provided in the
directive to assess the Q.A. of category 3 equipment which include
many bulk materials (junction boxes, welding sockets, luminaires,

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
etc.).

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 45
ng
ni
TOTAL/E&P Requirements – ATEX directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

6. NON ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


Co

• For mechanical equipment of category 2 and 3, self‐certification by


the manufacturer shall not be accepted (internal control of
production).
• For category 2 mechanical equipment, the ATEX directive imposes
the manufacturer to communicate to the N.B. the technical
documentation to be kept as archive only and to be opened only
in case of ...!
It is surprising that the N.B. has not been requested to verify the
content and validity of the documents submitted by the
manufacturer!!

7. APPLICATION OF ATEX DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC


• Application in the E.U. and E.F.T.A. countries is obviously

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
mandatory.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 46
ng
ni
TOTAL/E&P Requirements – ATEX directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Application outside the E.U. countries is also mandatory by TOTAL


Co

/ E&P decision for the following reasons:


• Manufacturers standard:
− Most internationally recognised manufacturers propose "ATEX
certified" products.
− Several notable American manufacturers are taking steps to apply the
ATEX directive (turbogenerators...).
− Today most manufacturers produce equipment in conformity with
CENELEC standards.
• Uniformity:
− Difficult to accept for TOTAL / E&P two different rules (inside and
outside Europe) for items related to safety at the highest level.
− If ATEX directive was not applied outside Europe, the only way to
certify equipment would be to accept a "Certificate of conformity" to
IEC standards.
− For simplification and ease of understanding, TOTAL / E&P shall apply

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
one rule: ATEX Directive 94/9/EC.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 47
ng
ni
TOTAL/E&P Requirements – ATEX directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• Simplification, consistency and standardisation:


Co

− For TOTAL / E&P managing various projects it is better to apply


simple and consistent rules that allow all potential manufacturers to
be compared and selected on a transparent basis.
− Apparently the ATEX directive 94/9/EC is becoming a de facto
international "code" and not only a European one (several non
European countries recognize the ATEX directive).

8. NOTIFIED BODIES
• Number of N.B.s has passed from some fifteen (old directive) to
about 55! New comers are expected in the future (Romania,
Bulgaria, etc).
• As many N.B.s will be new to many users some form of forum is
required to report feedback to ensure new N.B.s meet the paper
requirements.
• TOTAL / E&P wonders whether competence of all the N.B.s will be

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
identical, although it is on the paper. This is a serious issue.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 48
ng
ni
TOTAL/E&P Requirements – ATEX directive 94/9/EC

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

• The E.U. commission has been criticised for this issue, but the E.U.
Co

commission has no power for the appointment of a N.B. which


remains in the hands of the Member States’ Authorities.

• The non acceptance by an Operator of an E.C. type examination


certificate and/or a quality assurance notification issued by a
Notified Body who might appear "doubtful" is illegal!

• A restrictive list of Notified Bodies would be also illegal!

• Major concern also at other Operators!

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
• For TOTAL/E&P projects, it is highly advisable to identify the
NOTIFIED BODY before place the P.O., and remain very cautious
with "unknown" N.B.
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 49
ng
ni
Partial list of notified bodies (today 55 N.B.!)

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

LIST OF NOTIFIED BODIES UNDER DIRECTIVE 94/9/EC


py

Country Name of Notified Body Identification


Co

number
Austria Technischer Uberwachungs-Verein Ostereich (TUV-A) 0408
Belgium Institut Scientifique des Services Publics (ISSEP) (ex INIEX) 0492
Denmark Danmarks elektriske Materialkontrol (DEMKO) 0539
Finland Technical research Centre of Finland (VTT) 0537
France Institut National de l’Environnement Industriel et des Risques 0080
(INERIS) (ex: CERCHAR)
Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques (LCIE) 0081
Germany Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt (PTB) 0102
Bergbau-Versuchsstrecke (BVS)
TUV Hannover / Sachsen-Anhalt eV (TUV CERT) 0032
TUV Product Service GmbH (Munchen) 0123
DMT Gesellschaft fur Forschung und Prufung mbH (Essen)
Forschungsgesellschaft fur angewandte Systemsicherheit 0158
und Arbeitsmedizin mbH (FSA) - Mannheim 0588
Bundesanstalt fur Materialforschung und Prufung (BAM) - 0589
Berlin
IBExU-Institut fur Sicherheitstechnik GmbH – Freiberg 0637
Zelm ex Pruf- und Zertifizierungsstelle - Braunschweig 0820
Italy Centre Elettrotecnico Sperimentale Italiano (CESI) 0722
Luxembourg Service de l’Energie de l’Etat (SEE) 0499
Netherlands KEMA Registered Quality BV 0344
Northern Industrial Science Centre (ISC)
Ireland
Norway Norges Elektrske Materiell Kontroll (NEMKO) 0470
Det Norske Veritas Classification AS (DNV)
0575

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Spain Laboratorio Oficial José Maria Madariaga (LOM) 0163
Sweden Sveriges Provnings- OCH Forskininstitut (SP) 0402
United Electrical Equipment Certification Service (EECS) (ex 0600
BASEEFA)
Kingdom Sira Certification Service (SCS)
0518
ITS Testing and Certification Ltd 0359

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 50
ng
ni
Conclusion

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The ATEX story is not still the final chapter. Many discussions are
Co

still in progress with various partners including public authorities


(CLATEX in France, etc.).

 An "ATEX WORKING GROUP" has been created within TOTAL


organisation for coordination and implementation of the two
directives at Group level.

 An implementation guide has been recently issued (first edition).

 More responsibility is placed on the end user, in line with a


general trend found in other domains where the responsibility is
more and more on the end user’s shoulders whatever technical
provisions have been made.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 51
ng
ni
Conclusion

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

  Greater vigilance for the next 2‐3 years is advisable to allow


Co

all the involved parties to be fully familiarised with all these new
concepts and requirements.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 52
ng
ni
Useful websites

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Text of directive 94/9/EC:


Co

• http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/atex/direct/newpproach/ht

 List of competent authorities known to the Commission:


• http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/atex/listcomp.htm

 Useful addresses:
• http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/atex/usefullinks.htm

 List of Notified Bodies:


• http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/atex/nb/nblist.htm

 List of Harmonised Standards:


• http://europa.eu.int/comm/enterprise/newapproach/standardization/ha
rmstds/reflist/atex.htm

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
 IEC Ex Scheme:
• www.iecex.com/about.htm
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 53
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

The IECEx system (world level) 

New rules for explosive atmospheres

©  2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 54
ng
ni
The IECEx System

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The IECEx system is an international conformity assessment


Co

scheme for electrical equipment for use in hazardous locations


(HazLoc), based on IEC’s International Standards.

 It is a voluntary certification scheme intended to facilitate global


trade (ATEX is mandatory in the E.U. countries).

 The IECEx system aim is to achieve a harmonised product


evaluation by eradicating the need for multiple national
certification, reducing costs (testing and certification) to the
manufacturer, reducing barriers to entry, reducing time to

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
market.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 55
ng
ni
The IECEx System

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Many countries operate under different standards, Ex equipment


Co

often needs to be re‐tested and re‐certified to the appropriate


standards of that country.
 Under the IECEx scheme, Ex products will be tested by National
Certification Bodies, to ensure that the product has been
manufactured and tested to IEC international standards.
 An Ex product will receive an IECEx Test Report (ExTR), which is
acceptable to all other countries within the scheme.
 In addition to the ExTR, the manufacturer will obtain an IECEx
Certificate of Conformity (ExCoC) from a Certification Body
accepted in the scheme. The ExCoC will enable the manufacturer
to sell his products in other countries without going through their

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
national certification bodies.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 56
ng
ni
The IECEx System

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 A Quality Assessment Report (QAR) of the factory producing the


Co

Ex product shall be delivered to the manufacturer after successful


audit.

 The manufacturer will affix the IECEx mark of conformity to


illustrate compliance to the IEC Ex scheme.

 The QAR is based on a document which is identical to the ANNEX


IV of the ATEX directive (whatever the product).

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 57
ng
ni
The IECEx System

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

IEC STANDARDS:
Co

 The IEC Ex is based on IEC international standards.

 Therefore, every national standard applied by member countries


of the Scheme must be identical to the corresponding IEC
standards.

 For countries where national standards are not identical to IEC


standards, a period of transition will take place, allowing time for
the standards to be made identical to those of IEC, and for

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
national acceptance of CoC and the IEC Ex mark of conformity.

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 58
ng
ni
The IECEx System

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 Following publications have been relased by the IECEx system :


Co

• IEC Ex 01: IECEx scheme for Certification to Standards for Electrical


Equipment for explosive atmospheres. « Basic Rules ».

• IEC Ex 02: « Certified Equipment Scheme ». Rules of Procedures.

• IEC Ex 03: « Certified Service Facilities Scheme ». (Repair and


overhaul)

• IEC Ex 04: « Conformity Mark Licensing scheme »

• IEC Ex 05: « Certification of Personnel Competencies »

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
The above documents are completed by a set of Operational Documents (OD’s)

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 59
ng
ni
The IEC Ex Scheme

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py

 The ultimate aim of the IEC Ex scheme is a worldwide acceptance


Co

of:
• ONE STANDARD: IEC 60079 series for explosion protection
techniques, and IEC 61241 for combustible dust.

• ONE CERTIFICATE: one certificate from one certification body


(Electronic certificates via a secure Internet Website).

• ONE MARK: one single IEC Ex Mark accepted in all countries.

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 60
ng
ni
An example

ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig

 A UK Manufacturer wishes to export Ex products to Canada.


py
Co

Sends the equipment to 
a UK certification body

Tests to IEC standards,
issues an IECEx Test Report (ExTR)

Manufacturer sends ExTR
to Canadian certification body
in the IECEx Scheme

Recognising the UK body as a member of IECEx, 
the foreign body issues a certificate without 
the need for testing the equipment

© 2011 ‐ IFP Training
The UK Manufacturer can now affix
the mark of conformity of Canada and can now 
export the equipment to these countries

Electrical Systems in O&G Industry ‐ Part 10 B 61
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF IECEx 01A
ht
rig

Edition 1.0 2008-08


py
Co

IECEx PUBLICATION

IEC System for Certification to Standards relating to Equipment for use


in Explosive Atmospheres

An Informative Guide comparing various elements of both IECEx and ATEX


IECEx 01A:2008(E)
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
THIS PUBLICATION IS COPYRIGHT PROTECTED
ht

Copyright © 2008 IEC, Geneva, Switzerland


rig
py

All rights reserved. Unless otherwise specified, no part of this publication may be reproduced or utilized in any form
or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and microfilm, without permission in writing from
Co

either IEC or IEC's member National Committee in the country of the requester.
If you have any questions about IEC copyright or have an enquiry about obtaining additional rights to this publication,
please contact the address below or your local IEC member National Committee for further information.

IEC Central Office


3, rue de Varembé
CH-1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland
Email: inmail@iec.ch
Web: www.iec.ch

About the IEC


The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is the leading global organization that prepares and publishes
International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies.

About IEC publications


The technical content of IEC publications is kept under constant review by the IEC. Please make sure that you have the
latest edition, a corrigenda or an amendment might have been published.
ƒ Catalogue of IEC publications: www.iec.ch/searchpub
The IEC on-line Catalogue enables you to search by a variety of criteria (reference number, text, technical committee,…).
It also gives information on projects, withdrawn and replaced publications.
ƒ IEC Just Published: www.iec.ch/online_news/justpub
Stay up to date on all new IEC publications. Just Published details twice a month all new publications released. Available
on-line and also by email.
ƒ Electropedia: www.electropedia.org
The world's leading online dictionary of electronic and electrical terms containing more than 20 000 terms and definitions
in English and French, with equivalent terms in additional languages. Also known as the International Electrotechnical
Vocabulary online.
ƒ Customer Service Centre: www.iec.ch/webstore/custserv
If you wish to give us your feedback on this publication or need further assistance, please visit the Customer Service
Centre FAQ or contact us:
Email: csc@iec.ch
Tel.: +41 22 919 02 11
Fax: +41 22 919 03 00
ng
ni
ai
Tr
IF
P IECEx 01A
ht
rig

Edition 1.0 2008-08


py
Co

IECEx PUBLICATION

IEC System for Certification to Standards relating to Equipment for use


in Explosive Atmospheres

An Informative Guide comparing various elements of both IECEx and ATEX

INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSION PRICE CODE
ZZ
ng
ni
ai
Tr
–2– IECEx 01A © IEC:2008(E)

P
IF
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
ht

____________
rig
py

An Informative Guide comparing various elements


Co

of both IECEx and ATEX

INTRODUCTION

Since the introduction of the IECEx On-Line Certificate of Conformity, late 2003, there has
been a constant flow of inquires seeking an explanation of the differences between the IECEx
System and European ATEX System.

This document aims to provide a brief overview of the differences between the IECEx and the
ATEX Systems relating to specific items that are commonly raised.

This document is not a full listing of the differences and the reader is encouraged to consult an
appropriate organization, body or individual when in need of a more detailed explanation of
such differences.

Likewise, the information contained in this document is for information purposes with the rules
of the IECEx System and ATEX system taking precedence at all times.

Document History

Date Summary
August 2008 Original Issue (Version 1)

Address:
IECEx Secretariat
SAI Global Building
286 Sussex Street
Sydney NSW 2000
Australia

Contact Details:
Tel: +61 2 8206 6940
Fax: +61 2 8206 6272
e-mail: chris.agius@iecex.com
http://www.iecex.com
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
Brief Table of Comparison
P
Tr
ITEM IECEx ATEX
ai
ni
Organisation / Management Industry Representatives E. U. Commission
ng
(Manufacturers, Certification Bodies, Ex (Government Regulatory)
Equipment End Users, Regulators, Community
interests)
IECEx 01A © IEC:2008(E)

Aim One Single Certificate, for any hazardous area Covers Equipment, Remove barriers to trade and
product and Services recognised and accepted improve safety for equipment and workers
worldwide (Market Acceptance)

Validity / Legal Today: ATEX Directive is Law in all the E. U. Countries


- Products with IECEx Certificate accepted in (Mandatory application)
several countries
- Alternatively a single test report (ExTR) can be Limited to Europe
–3–

sent to any IECEx Certifier to issue locally


accepted certification

Field of Application Current:


- Electrical and Non electrical products and - Electrical and non electrical products and
systems systems
- Gas / Dust Industries - Gas / Dust Industries
- Now Covering SERVICE INDUSTRIES, e.g. Repair - Equipment ONLY
and Overhaul

Standards Used International Standards only, e.g. IEC Any recognised Standard may be applied provided
it meets the Essential Health and Safety
Requirements of the Directive. However, the E.U.
Commission approves list of Harmonised
Standards.
Compliance to Standards is mandatory Allows for Interpretation

Compliance to Standards not mandatory but is


generally used to assess products
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
ITEM IECEx ATEX
P
Tr
Certification Procedure ExCBs issue [for Certified Equipment Scheme]: ExNBs issue ai
- ExTR (Product Type) - EC Type examination certificate ni
- Ex QAR (production facility quality audit) - Ex QAN (Quality Assessment notification for ng
- IECEx CoC (Certificate of Conformity) production facility)

ExCBs issue [for Certified Service Facilities


Scheme]:
- CAR (IEC 60079-19 Compliance Report Form)
- FAR (Facilities Audit Report Form)
- IECEx CoC (Certificate of Conformity)

On-Line Certificate of Conformity System:


- Reports are officially registered on IECEx
website http://www.iecex.com
- Electronic On-Line CoC available for full public
view, acts as master controlled version
–4–

Common Rules applicable to all applications:


- Rules of Procedure for each Scheme (IECEx 02,
IECEx 03, IECEx 04)
- Operational Document ODs provide Standard
operating procedures to be followed by all
ExCBs
- Technical Decision Sheets
- Accessible full listing along with all System
documents maintained and available via single
IECEx website location
- Single appeals body available
- Decisions of the Management Committee are
binding on all ExCBs, Certificate Holders etc.
IECEx 01A © IEC:2008(E)
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
ITEM IECEx ATEX
P
Tr
Conformity Assessment For IECEx Certified Equipment Scheme: ai
Declaration of Conformity by Manufacturer to ni
ExTR + QAR = IECEx Certificate of Conformity declare that he is in possession of necessary ng
(CoC) documents and reports.

ExTR = IECEx Test Report - Certificate issued by ExNB only for category 1 / 2
QAR = IECEx Quality Assessment Report and M 1 / 2 electrical equipment
IECEx 01A © IEC:2008(E)

Applicable to ALL products, no difference between - Self certification allowed for Category 3 and
Zones or products Category 2 Mechanical.

CoC issued via Secure IEC website ensures FULL


Public access to issued Certificates

Self Certification not permitted


–5–

For IECEx Certified Services: Does not cover service facilities.

FAR + Assessment of Competencies = IECEx


Certificate

FAR = Facilities Audit Report

Applicable to ALL Services


CoC issued via Secure IEC website ensures FULL
Public access to issued Certificates

Self Certification not permitted


Co
py
rig
ht
IF
ITEM IECEx ATEX
P
Tr
Organisms for Certification All ExCBs and ExTLs are subject to the following ATEX Notified Bodies (ExNBs) appointed by ai
assessment: individual nomination of the governments of their ni
countries. ng
- Initial Peer Assessment by a 3 member IECEx
Assessment Team, prior to entry to IECEx A common assessment system does not exist.

- Annual Surveillance of ExCBs and ExTLs Surveillance of ExNBs dependant upon national
governments
- 5 Year re-assessment for all ExCBs and ExTLs

Dedicated IECEx Technical Secretariat to manage


day to day operations of the IECEx System

IECEx Management Committee (ExMC)

IECEx Technical Assessment Group (ExTAG)


–6–

IECEx Conformity Mark Committee (ExMarkCo)

Manufacturer Surveillance ExCB maintains the Status of the IECEx Certificate ExNBs conduct regular audits of manufacturers
of Conformity based on the outcome of follow up
Quality Audits, QARs

Work place Requirements Nothing – Refers to National regulations ATEX Directive 137 contains special requirements
for workers and management.

Putting IECEx and ATEX Together


The Key Elements:
- Technically Identical Standards for Electrical Equipment since 2005 (very few exceptions)
- When using IEC Standards a single set of Tests and assessments can be used for both IECEx and ATEX, in accordance with the
respective rules
- An ATEX EC Type Examination can be based on an IECEx ExTR BUT ATEX documentation alone is not sufficient for IECEx
- QA audits are the same for both IECEx and ATEX.
IECEx 01A © IEC:2008(E)
Co
py
rig
ht
IF
P
Tr
ai
ni
ng
ng
ni
ai
Tr
P
IF
ht
rig
py
Co

INTERNATIONAL
ELECTROTECHNICAL
COMMISSION

3, rue de Varembé
PO Box 131
CH-1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland

Tel: + 41 22 919 02 11
Fax: + 41 22 919 03 00
info@iec.ch
www.iec.ch

S-ar putea să vă placă și